223
OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI PACEMAN. Contents A-Z Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

2015 countryman

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 2015 countryman

OWNER'S MANUAL.MINI COUNTRYMAN.MINI PACEMAN.

ContentsA-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 2: 2015 countryman
Page 3: 2015 countryman

COOPERCOOPER S

JOHN COOPERWORKS

Owner's Manual for VehicleThank you for choosing a MINI.The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better controlyou will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Itcontains important information on vehicle operation that willhelp you make full use of the technical features available in yourMINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute tomaintaining the value of your MINI.Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐chures in the onboard literature.Set off now and have fun with your MINI.The MINI Team of BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 4: 2015 countryman

© 2015 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with the writtenconsent of BMW AG, Munich.US English II/15, 03 15 500Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleachedwithout chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 5: 2015 countryman

Addendum

ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUALWe wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed MINI Owner's Manual. These updates and clari-fications will supersede the materials contained in that document. 1. Where the terms “service center,” “the ser-

vice center,” “your service center,” “service specialist,” or “service” are used in the Ow-ner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a MINI dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your ve-hicle in accordance with MINI specifications.

2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual con-tains an affirmative instruction to contact a “service center” or “your service center,” we wanted to clarify that MINI recommends that, if you are faced with one of the situa-tions addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a MINI dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with MINI specifications. While MINI, at no cost to you, will pay for re-pairs required by the limited warranties pro-vided with respect to your vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Pro-gram during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage periods, you are free to elect, both during those periods and the-reafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops.

3. Where the Owner's Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been appro-ved by MINI, those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by MINI. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do, we recommend that you make sure

that any such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle.

4. At page 6 and page 7, under the warranty section's discussion of homologation, where it states that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there,” the text should read that you “may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there.”

5. At page 7, in the “Parts and accessories” sec-tion, the sentence beginning “For your own safety … ,” should be disregarded and the following the text should be read in lieu the-reof: “The manufacturer of your vehicle re-commends using genuine MINI parts and accessories.” In the fifth sentence of that pa-ragraph, the word “cannot” should read “does not.”

6. At page 39, in the “Checking and replacing safety belts” section, the text beginning, “Have the work performed only by your ser-vice center …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu the-reof: “MINI recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is impor-tant that this safety feature functions pro-perly.”

7. At page 112 under the heading: “Objects in the area around the pedals” and at page 189 under the heading: “Carpets/floor mats,” the paragraph that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your ve-hicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropri-ate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place.”

8. At page 119, under the heading: “Have maintenance carried out,” the sentence be-ginning, “Have the maintenance carried out …” should be disregarded and the fol-lowing text should be read in lieu thereof: 

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 6: 2015 countryman

Addendum

“MINI recommends that you have the main-tenance carried out by your service center.”

9. At page 152, under the heading “Pressure specifications,” the sentence beginning, “The inflation pressures apply to the tire si-zes approved … .” should be disregarded.

10. At page 159, under the heading: “Approved wheels and tires,” the term “Approved” should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, the term “Recommended” should be read in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type; other-wise, for example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non-recommended wheels and ti-res to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle.

11. At page 165, under the heading “Hood,” the sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar” should be disregarded.

12. At page 169, under the heading: “Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US Models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian Models,” the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that you have maintenance and re-pair performed by your MINI dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with MINI specifications. The manufacturer of your ve-hicle recommends that you maintain re-cords of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle.

13. At page 179, under the “Battery replace-ment” section, the text should be disregar-ded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read: Use of recommended vehicle batteriesThe manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be da-maged and systems or functions may not be fully available.After a battery replacement, the manufactu-rer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that any “check control” messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 7: 2015 countryman

ContentsThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic or item is by using the index, refer topage 210.

6 Notes

AT A GLANCE12 Cockpit

CONTROLS20 Opening and closing35 Adjusting43 Transporting children safely48 Driving58 Displays66 Lamps71 Safety81 Driving stability control systems85 Driving comfort88 Climate94 Interior equipment104 Storage compartments

DRIVING TIPS110 Things to remember when driving114 Loading118 Saving fuel

ENTERTAINMENT122 Radio MINI Boost CD

COMMUNICATION136 Telephone

MOBILITY148 Refueling150 Fuel152 Wheels and tires164 Engine compartment166 Engine oil168 Coolant169 Maintenance171 Replacing components181 Breakdown assistance186 Care191 Indicator/warning lamps

REFERENCE206 Technical data210 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 8: 2015 countryman

NotesUsing this Owner'sManualThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic is by using the index.An initial overview of the vehicle is provided inthe first chapter.

Additional sources of informationShould you have any questions, your servicecenter will be glad to advise you at any time.Information on MINI, e.g., on technology, isavailable on the Internet: www.mini.comInformation about MINI, e.g., on technology, isavailable on the Internet: www.miniusa.com

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility ofpersonal injury and serious damage to thevehicle.◄ Marks the end of a specific item ofinformation."..." Identifies radio display texts used to selectindividual functions.›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voiceoperation system.››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by thevoice operation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken tohelp protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the

relevant section of this Owner's Manual forinformation on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle equipmentThe manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayeri‐sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMWAG.This Owner's Manual describes all models, allseries equipment, as well as country-specificand special equipment offered in the modelseries. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de‐scribes and depicts equipment that may not becontained in your vehicle because of the se‐lected special equipment or country version, forexample.This also applies to safety-related functions andsystems.For options and equipment not described inthis Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐plementary Owner's Manuals.

Status of this Owner'sManual at time of print‐ingThe manufacturer of your vehicle pursues apolicy of constant development that is con‐ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue toembody the highest quality and safety stan‐dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ fromthose in your vehicle.

For your own safetyWarrantyYour vehicle is technically configured for theoperating conditions and registration require‐ments applying in the country of first delivery— homologation. If your vehicle is to be oper‐ated in a different country it might be neces‐

Seite 6

Notes

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 9: 2015 countryman

sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ‐ing operating conditions and permitrequirements. If your vehicle does not complywith the homologation requirements in a cer‐tain country you cannot lodge warranty claimsfor your vehicle there. Further information canbe obtained from your Service Center.

Maintenance and repairsAdvanced technology, e.g., the use of modernmaterials and high-performance electronics,requires suitable maintenance and repairmethods.Therefore, have this work performed only by aMINI service center or a workshop that worksaccording to MINI repair procedures with ap‐propriately trained personnel.

If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.

Parts and accessoriesFor your own safety, it is recommended thatyou use genuine parts and accessories ap‐proved by MINI. When you purchase accesso‐ries tested and approved by MINI and GenuineMINI Parts, you simultaneously acquire the as‐surance that they have been thoroughly testedby MINI to ensure optimum performance wheninstalled on your vehicle. MINI warrants theseparts to be free from defects in material andworkmanship. MINI will not accept any liabilityfor damage resulting from installation of partsand accessories not approved by MINI. MINIcannot test every product made by other man‐ufacturers to verify if it can be used on a MINIsafely and without risk to either the vehicle, itsoperation, or its occupants. Genuine MINI Parts,MINI Accessories and other products approvedby MINI, together with professional advice onusing these items, are available from all MINIcenters. Installation and operation of non MINIapproved accessories such as alarms, radios,amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspensioncomponents, brake dust shields, telephones,

including operation of any mobile phone fromwithin the vehicle without using an externallymounted antenna, or transceiver equipment,for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios orsimilar accessories, may cause extensive dam‐age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter‐fere with the vehicle's electrical system or af‐fect the validity of the MINI Limited Warranty.See your MINI center for additional informa‐tion. Maintenance, replacement, or repair ofthe emission control devices and systems maybe performed by any automotive repair estab‐lishment or individual using any certified auto‐motive part.

California Proposition 65 WarningCalifornia laws require us to state the followingwarning:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐bile components and parts, including compo‐nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐cle, contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de‐fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐tain fluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain or emitchemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that have causedcancer in laboratory animals. Always protectyour skin by washing thoroughly with soap andwater.

Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publicationthoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐lowing warranties:▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.

Seite 7

Notes

7Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 10: 2015 countryman

▷ California Emission Control System LimitedWarranty.

Detailed information about these warranties islisted in the Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models or in the Warranty andService Guide Booklet for Canadian models.Your vehicle has been specifically adapted anddesigned to meet the particular operating con‐ditions and homologation requirements in yourcountry and continental region in order to de‐liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle isoperated under those conditions. If you wish tooperate your vehicle in another country or re‐gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐ditions and homologation requirements. Youshould also be aware of any applicable war‐ranty limitations or exclusions for such countryor region. In such case, please contact Cus‐tomer Relations for further information.

MaintenanceMaintain the vehicle regularly to sustain theroad safety, operational reliability and the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ures:▷ MINI Maintenance system▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian modelsIf the vehicle is not maintained according tothese specifications, this could result in seriousdamage to the vehicle. Such damage is notcovered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐ranty.

Data memoryNumerous electronic components in your vehi‐cle contain data memories that store technicalinformation on the vehicle condition, events

and faults, either temporarily or permanently.This technical information generally documentsthe state of a component, a module, a systemor the environment:▷ Operating conditions of system compo‐

nents, such as filling levels.▷ Status messages from the vehicle and its in‐

dividual components, such as wheel rpm/speed, motion delay, transverse accelera‐tion.

▷ Malfunctions and defects in important sys‐tem components, such as lights and brakes.

▷ Vehicle responses to special driving situa‐tions, such as airbag deployment, use ofthe stability control systems.

▷ Ambient conditions, such as the tempera‐ture.

These data are of a technical nature only andare used to detect and eliminate faults and tooptimize vehicle functions. Travel profiles ofroutes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre‐ated from these data. If services are used, forinstance in the event of repairs, service proc‐esses, warranty cases, quality assurance, etc.,this technical information can be read out fromthe event and fault data memories by servicepersonnel, including the manufacturer, usingspecial diagnosis tools. This service personnelcan provide you with more information ifneeded. After troubleshooting, the informationin the fault memory is cleared or overwrittencontinuously.Situations are conceivable during the use of thevehicle in which these technical data could be‐come associated with a specific person in com‐bination with other information, such as an ac‐cident report, damage to the vehicle, witnessaccounts, etc., possibly with the involvement ofan authorized expert.Additional functions that are contractuallyagreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐calization in the event of an emergency, permitthe transfer of certain vehicle data out of thevehicle.

Seite 8

Notes

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 11: 2015 countryman

Event Data Recorder EDRThis vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐tions, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐standing how a vehicle's systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:▷ How various systems in your vehicle were

operating.▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened.▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal.▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under‐standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur.EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if anontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location, are recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ment, could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying data routinely ac‐quired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi‐cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

Reporting safety defectsFor US customersThe following only applies to vehicles ownedand operated in the US.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety AdministrationNHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of NorthAmerica, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, NewJersey 07675-1227, Telephone1-800-831-1117.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer,or BMW of North America, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐rcar.gov

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report asafety- related defect to Transport Canada, De‐fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephonethe toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You canalso obtain other information about motor ve‐hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐ety.

Seite 9

Notes

9Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 12: 2015 countryman

WATCH ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 13: 2015 countryman

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 14: 2015 countryman

CockpitVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

All around the steering wheel

1 Setting the exterior mirror, folding it in andout  40

Power windows, front  33

MINI Countryman: power win‐dows, rear  33

MINI Countryman: safety switchfor rear power windows  34

2 Parking lights  66

Low beams  66

Automatic headlamp con‐trol  66Adaptive Light Control  68Turn signal  51

Seite 12

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 15: 2015 countryman

High-beams  51Headlight flasher  51Roadside parking lights  67

Computer  59

3 Tachometer  59Instrument lighting  69

Resetting the trip odometer  58

4 Washer/wiper system  52

5 Start/stop the engine and switchthe ignition on/off  48

6 Ignition lock  487 Steering wheel buttons, right

Resuming cruise control  86

Storing the speed and accelerat‐ing or slowing down  86

Activating/deactivating cruisecontrol  85

Steering wheel buttons, leftVolume

Telephone  136

Change the radio stationSelect a music trackScroll through the redial list

8 Horn, the entire surface9 Adjust the steering wheel  4210 Releasing the hood  165

Seite 13

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

13Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 16: 2015 countryman

Displays

1 Tachometer  59with indicator and warning lights  15

2 Display for▷ Current speed  58▷ Indicator/warning lights  15

3 Resetting the trip odometer  584 Display for

▷ Steptronic transmission position  55▷ On-board computer  59▷ Service requirements  63▷ Odometer and trip odometer  58

▷ Flat Tire Monitor  74▷ Tire Pressure Monitor  76▷ Settings and information  60▷ Personal Profile settings  20

5 Instrument lighting  696 Speedometer with indicator and warning

lights  157 Fuel gauge  598 Radio display9 Radio Radio MINI Boost CD  122

Seite 14

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 17: 2015 countryman

Indicator/warning lightsThe concept

The indicator and warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors in displayarea 1 or 2.

Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning when the engine is started or theignition is switched on, and light up briefly.

What to do in case of a malfunctionA list of all indicator and warning lights, as wellas notes on possible causes of malfunctionsand on how to respond, refer to page 191

All around the center console

1 Hazard warning system2 Speedometer with

Radio MINI Boost CD  1223 CD drive

4 Air conditioning, automatic climate con‐trol  89

5 Buttons on the center console

Seite 15

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

15Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 18: 2015 countryman

Seat heating  37

Central locking, inside  25

Front fog lamps  69

Sport button  83

Driving stability control systemsDSC Dynamic Stability Con‐trol  81DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐trol  82

6 Storage compartment

All around the head‐liner

1 Indicator/warning lights for the front pas‐senger airbags  73

2 Reading lights  70

Ambient lighting color  70

Glass sunroof, electrical  31

Interior lights  69

All around the shift/selector lever

1 AUX-IN port  130USB audio interface  131

Seite 16

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 19: 2015 countryman

Seite 17

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

17Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 20: 2015 countryman

HANDLE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 21: 2015 countryman

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 22: 2015 countryman

Opening and closingVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Remote control/keyButtons on the remote control

1 Opening tailgate2 Unlocking3 Locking

General informationEach remote control contains a rechargeablebattery that is automatically recharged when itis in the ignition lock while the car is beingdriven. Use each remote control at least twice ayear for longer road trips in order to maintainthe batteries' charge status.In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, theremote control contains a replaceable battery,refer to page 30.

The settings called up and implemented whenthe vehicle is unlocked depend on which re‐mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Per‐sonal Profile, refer to page 20.In addition, information about service require‐ments is stored in the remote control, Servicedata in the remote control, refer to page 169.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to unlock the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:▷ Driver's door, refer to page 24.

New remote controlsYou can obtain new remote controls from yourservice center.

Loss of the remote controlsLost remote controls can be blocked by yourservice center.

Personal ProfileThe conceptYou can set several of your vehicle's functionsto suit your personal needs and preferences.▷ Through Personal Profile, most of these set‐

tings are stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Seite 20

CONTROLS Opening and closing

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 23: 2015 countryman

▷ While the vehicle is being unlocked, the re‐mote control is recognized and the settingsstored with it are called up and imple‐mented.

▷ Your personal settings will be recognizedand called up again even if the vehicle hasbeen used in the meantime by someoneelse with another remote control.

▷ The individual settings are stored for nomore than three remote controls.

Personal Profile settingsThe following functions and settings can bestored in a profile.More information on the settings can be foundunder:▷ Response of the central locking system

when the car is being unlocked, refer topage 22.

▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer topage 26.

▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer topage 51.

▷ Settings for the displays in the speedometerand tachometer:▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to

page 61.▷ Date format, refer to page 61.▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,

distance covered/remaining distances,and temperature, refer to page 61.

▷ Light settings:▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer

to page 68.▷ Daytime running lights, refer to

page 67.▷ Automatic climate control, refer to

page 90: AUTO program, activating/deac‐tivating the cooling function, setting thetemperature, air volume, and air distribu‐tion.

▷ Entertainment:

▷ Last entertainment source.▷ Radio MINI Boost CD:

Tone settings, refer to page 124.Volume, refer to page 124.

Central locking systemThe conceptThe central locking system becomes activewhen the driver's door is closed.The system simultaneously engages and re‐leases the locks on the following:▷ Doors.▷ Tailgate.▷ Fuel filler flap.

Operating from the outside▷ Via the remote control.▷ Via the door lock.▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door

handles on the driver's and front passengersides.

The following takes place simultaneously whenlocking/unlocking the vehicle via the remotecontrol:▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

anti-theft protection is switched on and offas well. The anti-theft protection makes itimpossible to unlock the doors using thelock buttons or door handles.

▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps, andambient lighting are switched on and off.

▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re‐fer to page 30.

Operating from the insideVia the switch/button for the central lockingsystem, refer to page 25.In an accident of the necessary severity, thecentral locking system unlocks automatically.

Seite 21

Opening and closing CONTROLS

21Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 24: 2015 countryman

The hazard warning system and interior lampscome on.

Opening and closing:from the outsideUsing the remote control

General informationTake the remote control with youPeople or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐side. Always take the remote control with youwhen leaving the vehicle so that the vehiclecan then be opened from the outside.◀

Unlocking

Press the button. The vehicle is un‐locked.The welcome lamps and interior lamps areswitched on.You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐cator lever until the display changes.

4. Press the button in the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until the symbol and "SET" aredisplayed.

5. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐cator lever until the display changes.

6. Press the button in the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until the symbol shown is dis‐played, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐cator lever until the display changes.

8. Press the button in the turn indicator leverrepeatedly to select the following settings:▷

Selected setting:

Pressing the button on the re‐mote control once unlocks only thedriver's door and the fuel filler flap.Pressing twice unlocks the entire vehi‐cle.

▷ Selected setting:

Seite 22

CONTROLS Opening and closing

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 25: 2015 countryman

Pressing the button on the re‐mote control once unlocks the entirevehicle.

9. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐cator lever until the display changes. Thesetting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Convenient opening

Press and hold the button on the re‐mote control.The power windows are opened. Depending onthe vehicle equipment, the glass sunroof israised.Convenient closing with the remote control isnot possible.

Locking

Press the button.Locking from the outsideDo not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot beunlocked from inside without special knowl‐edge.◀

Setting the confirmation signalsHave unlocking or locking of the vehicle con‐firmed.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button to select, arrow:▷ Confirmation signal during unlock‐

ing▷ Confirmation signal during locking

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to select:▷

The hazard warning system flashes dur‐ing unlocking/locking.

▷ An acoustic signal sounds during un‐locking/locking.

▷ The hazard warning system lights upand an acoustic signal sounds duringunlocking/locking.

Seite 23

Opening and closing CONTROLS

23Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 26: 2015 countryman

▷ The function is deactivated.

9. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges. The setting is stored.

Switching on the interior lampsWhen the vehicle is locked:

Press the button.You can also use this function to locate your ve‐hicle in parking garages, etc.

Unlocking the tailgate

Press the button for approx. 1 secondand then release it.

MalfunctionsThe function of the remote control may be im‐paired by local radio waves. If this occurs, un‐lock and lock the vehicle at the door lock withthe integrated key.If it should become impossible to lock the vehi‐cle with a remote control, the battery in the re‐mote control is discharged. Use this remotecontrol on an extended trip to recharge thebattery, refer to page 20.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is governedby the following:FCC ID:LX8766SLX8766ELX8CASCompliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐ence, and

▷ this device must accept any interference re‐ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes tothese devices could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

Using the door lock

Sets how the vehicle is to be unlocked, refer topage 22.

In some vehicle equipment versions, only thedriver's door can be unlocked and locked viathe door lock.

Locking from the outsideDo not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot beunlocked from inside without special knowl‐edge.◀

Unlocking the doors and tailgate atonceTo lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail‐gate at once:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐ing the button for the central locking sys‐tem in the interior, refer to page 25.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐senger door, refer to page 25.

3. To lock the vehicle:

Seite 24

CONTROLS Opening and closing

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 27: 2015 countryman

▷ Lock the driver's door using theintegrated key in the door lock, or

▷ Press down the lock button of the frontpassenger door and close the doorfrom the outside.

Convenient opening and closingIn vehicles with an alarm system or Comfort Ac‐cess, the windows and the glass sunroof can beoperated via the door lock.

Opening/closingTurn the key to the unlock or lock position andhold it there.

Keep the closing area clearWatch during the opening and closing

process to be sure that no one becomes trap‐ped. Releasing the key stops the motion.◀

Manual operationIf an electrical malfunction occurs, the driver'sdoor can be unlocked or locked by turning theintegrated key to the end positions of the doorlock.

Opening and closing:from the insideOperation via▷ Switch in the center console:

▷ Button in the driver's or front passengerdoor:

The graphic shows the button in the MINI Pace‐man as an example.The switch or the buttons can be used to lockor unlock the doors and tailgate when thedoors are closed, but they are not theft-pro‐tected. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Unlocking and opening doors▷ Using the switch or the buttons for the cen‐

tral locking system, unlock all of the doorsat once and then pull the door openerabove the armrest, or

▷ Pull the door handle on each door twice:the door is unlocked the first time andopened the second time.

Locking▷ Press the switch/button or▷ Push down the lock button of a door. To

avoid locking yourself out by accident, thedriver's door cannot be locked at the lockbutton while the door is open.

Seite 25

Opening and closing CONTROLS

25Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 28: 2015 countryman

Automatic lockingIn addition, it is possible to set the situations inwhich the vehicle locks. The setting is stored forthe remote control in use.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to select:▷

The central locking system locks auto‐matically after some time if no door isopened.

▷ The vehicle locks automatically afteryou drive away.

▷ The vehicle locks automatically after ashort period of time if a door is notopened or after you drive away.

▷ The central locking system remains un‐locked.

9. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges. The setting is stored.

TailgateOpeningThe tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐fore opening.

Provide edge protectionSharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heatingwires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐tion.◀

Only drive with the tailgate fully closed; other‐wise, the tail lamps will be hidden from viewand driving safety will be compromised.In some market-specific versions, the tailgatecan only be unlocked using the remote controlif the vehicle was unlocked first.

Seite 26

CONTROLS Opening and closing

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 29: 2015 countryman

Opening from the inside

Press the button on the driver's footwell.

MINI Countryman

Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow,or

Press the button on the remote controlfor approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate isunlocked.

MINI Paceman

Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow,or

Press the button on the remote controlfor approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate isunlocked.

ClosingKeep the closing area clearMake sure that the closing area of the

tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damagemay result.◀

Take the remote control with youAlways take the remote control with you

when leaving the vehicle and do not place it inthe cargo area; otherwise, the remote controlmay be locked into the vehicle when the tail‐gate is closed.◀

Move the cover into positionWhen closing, ensure that the cargo cover

is resting on the rubber buffers of the securingstraps; otherwise, damage may occur whenclosing the tailgate.◀

MINI Countryman

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgatecan be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐gate.

Seite 27

Opening and closing CONTROLS

27Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 30: 2015 countryman

MINI Paceman

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgatecan be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐gate.

Comfort AccessThe conceptThe vehicle can be accessed without activatingthe remote control. All you need to do is tohave the remote control with you, e.g., in yourjacket pocket. The vehicle automatically de‐tects the remote control when it is nearby or inthe passenger compartment.Comfort Access supports the following func‐tions:▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.▷ Starting the engine.

Functional requirements▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐

ence in the vicinity.▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle.▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds.▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐

mote control is inside the vehicle.▷ The doors and tailgate must be closed to

operate the windows.

Comparison with ordinary remotecontrolThe functions can be controlled by pressing thebuttons or via Comfort Access.Notes on opening and closing, refer to page 20.If you notice a brief delay while opening orclosing the windows or glass sunroof, the sys‐tem is checking whether a remote control is in‐side the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closingprocedure, if necessary.

Unlocking

Press button 1.

Depending on the setting, either only the driv‐er's door or the entire vehicle is unlocked, referto page 22.Pressing the button again locks the entire vehi‐cle again.Convenient opening with the remote control,refer to page 23.

LockingPress button 1.For Convenient closing, press and hold but‐ton 1.The windows and, if applicable, the glass sun‐roof are closed in addition.

Unlocking the tailgate separatelyPress the top half of the MINI emblem.This corresponds to pressing the following but‐

ton on the remote control: .

Seite 28

CONTROLS Opening and closing

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 31: 2015 countryman

If a remote control accidentally left in the cargoarea is detected in the locked vehicle after thetailgate is closed, the tailgate opens againslightly. The hazard warning system flashes andan acoustic signal sounds.

Power windows and electrical glasssunroofWhen the engine is switched off, the windowsand the sunroof can be operated as long asneither the doors nor the tailgate are opened.When the door and tailgate are closed againand the remote control is detected inside thevehicle, the windows and the sunroof can beoperated again.Insert the remote control into the ignition lockto be able to operate the windows and the sun‐roof while the engine is switched off and thedoors are open.

Switching on the radio ready statePress the Start/Stop button to switch on theradio ready state, refer to page 48.Do not depress the brake or the clutch; other‐wise, the engine will start.

Starting the engineThe engine can be started or the ignition canbe switched on, refer to page 48, when a re‐mote control is inside the vehicle. It is not nec‐essary to insert a remote control into the igni‐tion lock.

Switching off the engine in cars withSteptronic transmissionThe engine can only be switched off with theselector lever in position P, refer to page 55.To switch off the engine with the selector leverin position N, the remote control must be in‐serted in the ignition lock.

Before driving a vehicle with Steptronictransmission into a car wash1. Insert the remote control into the ignition

switch.2. Depress the brake pedal.3. Move the selector lever to position N.4. Switch the engine off.The vehicle can roll.

MalfunctionThe Comfort Access functions can be disturbedby local radio waves, such as by a mobilephone in the immediate vicinity of the remotecontrol or when a mobile phone is beingcharged in the vehicle.If this occurs, open or close the vehicle usingthe buttons on the remote control or use theintegrated key in the door lock.To start the engine afterward, insert the remotecontrol into the ignition switch.

Warning lightsThe warning light in the instrumentcluster lights up when you attempt tostart the engine: the engine cannot be

started.The remote control is not in the vehicle or has amalfunction. Take the remote control with youinside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces‐sary, insert another remote control into the ig‐nition switch.

The warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up while the engine is run‐ning: the remote control is no longer in‐

side the vehicle.After switching off the engine, the engine canonly be started again within approx. 10 sec‐onds if no door has been opened.

The indicator lamp lights up: replacethe remote control battery.

Seite 29

Opening and closing CONTROLS

29Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 32: 2015 countryman

Replacing the batteryThe remote control for Comfort Access containsa battery that will need to be replaced fromtime to time.

1. Remove the cover.

2. Insert a new battery with the positive sidefacing upwards.

3. Press the cover closed.Return used battery to a recycling centeror to your service center.

Alarm systemThe conceptThe enabled alarm system reacts to the follow‐ing:▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.▷ Movements inside the vehicle.▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐

tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.Depending on the market-specific version, thealarm system briefly signals unauthorized entryattempts by:▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.

Arming and disarming the alarm system

General informationWhen the vehicle is locked and unlocked, thealarm system is armed and disarmed at thesame time.

Door lock and armed alarm systemUnlocking via the door lock will trigger thealarm on some market-specific versions.To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with theremote control or switch on the ignition.

Tailgate with armed alarm systemThe tailgate, refer to page 24, can also beopened when the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote con‐trol.When you subsequently close the tailgate, it isagain locked and monitored.Unlocking via the door lock will trigger thealarm on some market-specific versions.

Switching off the alarm▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐

trol, refer to page 22.▷ Insert the remote control all the way into

the ignition lock.▷ With Comfort Access and if you are carrying

the remote control with you, push the but‐ton on the door lock.

Display on the tachometerWhen the alarm system is being armed, all LEDspulse like a heartbeat. One LED flashes afterapprox. 16 minutes.

Seite 30

CONTROLS Opening and closing

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 33: 2015 countryman

▷ LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed.▷ One LED flashes at short intervals: the

doors, hood, or tailgate is not properlyclosed.Even if these are not closed fully, the re‐maining items are locked and the LEDspulse after approx. 10 seconds for approx.16 minutes; afterwards, one LED flashes.The interior motion sensor is not activated.

▷ The LEDs go out after the vehicle is un‐locked: the vehicle has not been tamperedwith in the meantime.

▷ The LEDs flash after the vehicle is unlockeduntil the remote control is inserted in theignition, but for no longer than approx.5 minutes: the vehicle has been tamperedwith in the meantime.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote controlfor at least two seconds.To switch off the alarm: press any button on theremote control.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored.The alarm system responds in situations such asattempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

Interior motion sensorFor the interior motion sensor to function prop‐erly, the windows and the glass sunroof mustbe closed.

Avoiding unintentional alarmsThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensorcan be switched off together, such as in the fol‐lowing situations:▷ In duplex garages.▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer.▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior motion sensor

▷ Press the button on the remotecontrol twice in succession.

▷ Lock the vehicle twice with the integratedkey.

The LEDs flash in short succession for approx.2 seconds. The tilt alarm sensor and interiormotion sensor remain switched off until the ve‐hicle is unlocked and locked again.

Glass sunroof, electricalGeneral information

Danger of pinchingMonitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof isclear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐selves.◀

Convenient operation via:▷ Door lock, refer to page 24

Seite 31

Opening and closing CONTROLS

31Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 34: 2015 countryman

▷ Comfort Access, refer to page 28

Tilting the glass sunroofMINI Countryman:▷ Press the switch back to the resistance

point and hold.Both glass sunroofs are raised.Releasing stops the motion.

▷ With the ignition switched on, press theswitch back past the resistance point.Both closed glass sunroofs are raised fully.Pressing again stops the motion.

MINI Paceman:▷ Press the switch back to the resistance

point and hold.The front glass sunroof is raised.Releasing stops the motion.

▷ With the ignition switched on, press theswitch back past the resistance point.The front glass sunroof is fully raised.Pressing again stops the motion.

Opening, closingMINI Countryman:▷ In the raised position with the ignition

switched on, press the switch back andhold.The front glass sunroof is opened. The rearglass sunroof is closed.Releasing stops the motion.

The same method is used to close the glasssunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for‐ward.The front glass sunroof remains in the raisedposition. The rear glass sunroof is raised. Press‐ing again closes both sunroofs completely.MINI Paceman:▷ In the raised position with the ignition

switched on, press the switch back andhold.The front glass sunroof is opened.Releasing stops the motion.

The same method is used to close the glasssunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for‐ward.The front glass sunroof remains in the raisedposition. Pressing again closes the roof com‐pletely.

Roller sunblindThe roller sunblind can be opened and closedseparately from the glass sunroof.

After a power failureAfter a power failure, it could happen that thesunroof can only be raised. In this case, havethe system initialized. The manufacturer of yourMINI recommends having this work performedby the service center.

Power windowsGeneral information

Danger of pinchingMonitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window isclear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Seite 32

CONTROLS Opening and closing

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 35: 2015 countryman

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐jure themselves.◀

If, after having been opened and closed a num‐ber of times in close succession, a window canonly be closed, the system is overheated. Letthe system cool down for several minutes withthe ignition switched on or the engine running.

Opening, closing

Front windows

To open:▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The

window opens while the switch is held.▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance

point. The window opens automatically inthe radio ready state and higher.Press again briefly to stop the opening pro‐cedure.

To close:▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The

window closes while the switch is held.▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically.Pressing the switch stops the motion.

MINI Countryman: rear windows

To open:▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The

window opens while the switch is held.▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance

point. The window opens automatically inthe radio ready state and higher.

To close:▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The

window closes while the switch is held.▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically.Pressing the switch stops the motion.

After the ignition is switched offThe windows can be operated for approx. 1 mi‐nute after the remote control is removed or theignition is switched off.

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐jure themselves.◀

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force exceeds a specific value as awindow closes, the closing action is inter‐rupted.The window reopens slightly.

Seite 33

Opening and closing CONTROLS

33Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 36: 2015 countryman

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐tection

Even with the pinch protection system, checkthat the window's closing path is clear; other‐wise, the closing action may not stop in certainsituations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀

Do not use window accessoriesDo not install any accessories in the range

of movement of the windows; otherwise, thepinch protection system will be impaired.◀

Closing without the pinch protectionsystem

Danger of pinchingMonitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window isclear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

If there is an external danger or, for example, ifice on the windows prevents a window fromclosing normally, the window can be closedmanually.

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point andhold it there. Pinch protection is limited andthe window reopens slightly if the closingforce exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance pointagain within approx. 4 seconds and hold itthere.The window closes without pinch protec‐tion.

MINI Countryman: safety switch

With the safety switch, the rear windows areprevented from being opened or closed via theswitches in the rear passenger area, such as bychildren.Press the button. The LED lights up if the safetyfunction is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operationPress the safety switch when transporting

children in the rear; otherwise, injury may resultif the windows are closed without supervi‐sion.◀

Seite 34

CONTROLS Opening and closing

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 37: 2015 countryman

AdjustingVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Sitting safelyThe ideal seating position can make a vital con‐tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.The seating position plays an important role inan accident in combination with:▷ Safety belts, refer to page 37▷ Head restraints, refer to page 39.▷ Airbags, refer to page 71.

SeatsNote before adjusting

Do not adjust the seat while drivingNever attempt to adjust the driver's seat

while driving. The seat could respond with un‐expected movement and the ensuing loss ofvehicle control could lead to an accident.◀

Do not incline the backrest too far to therear

Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the

safety belt in an accident. This would eliminatethe protection normally provided by the belt.◀

Front seat adjustment

Forward/backward

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat intothe desired position, arrows 2.After releasing the lever, move the seat forwardor back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐erly.

Height

Pull the lever up or push it down repeatedly, ar‐rows 1, until the desired height is reached, ar‐rows .

BackrestMINI Countryman:

Seite 35

Adjusting CONTROLS

35Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 38: 2015 countryman

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weightto the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

MINI Paceman:

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weightto the backrest or lift it off, as necessary, ar‐rows 2.

Lumbar supportYou can also adjust the contour of the backrestto obtain additional support in the lumbar re‐gion.The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐plementary support to help you maintain a re‐laxed, upright sitting position.

The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as anexample.Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the cur‐vature.

MINI Countryman: rear seat adjustmentObserve the following when adjustingDo not adjust the rear seats during a trip;

otherwise, there is a risk of passenger injury.Make sure that the locking mechanisms of therear seats engage properly. Otherwise the re‐straining effect of the safety belts during an ac‐cident could be reduced.◀

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat into the desiredposition.Release the lever and move the seat slightlyforward or back so that it engages properly.

BackrestAdjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 100.

Seite 36

CONTROLS Adjusting

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 39: 2015 countryman

Seat heating

Switching onThe temperature setting progresses one stepthrough its control sequence each time youpress the button. The maximum temperature isreached when three LEDs are lit.If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐cally with the temperature set last.The temperature is reduced, if need be, downto no heat in order to reduce the load on thebattery. The LEDs remain lit.

Switching offPress the button longer.

Safety beltsNumber of safety beltsYour vehicle has been fitted with four or fivesafety belts for the safety of you and your pas‐sengers.However, they can only offer protection whenadjusted correctly.

NotesAlways make sure that safety belts are beingworn by all occupants before driving away.Although airbags enhance safety by providingadded protection, they are not a substitute forsafety belts.

The shoulder strap's anchorage point will becorrect for adult seat occupants of every build ifthe seat is correctly adjusted.

One person per safety beltNever allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants orsmall children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

Putting on the beltLay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to thebody as possible. Make sure that the belt lieslow around the hips in the lap area and doesnot press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the beltcan slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontalimpact and injure the abdomen.The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rubon sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐ble objects, or be pinched.◀

Reduction of restraining effectAvoid wearing clothing that prevents the

belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulderbelt periodically to readjust the tension acrossyour lap; otherwise, the retention effect of thesafety belt may be reduced.◀

Buckling the beltMINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Seite 37

Adjusting CONTROLS

37Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 40: 2015 countryman

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage inthe belt buckle.The shoulder strap's anchorage point will becorrect for adult seat occupants of every build ifthe seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 35.

Unbuckling the belt1. Hold the belt firmly.2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Securing the buckle tonguesIf the front passenger seat is not occupied, slidethe buckle tongue up to the belt stop knob withthe clip.When the outer rear seats are not occupied, thebuckle tongues of the rear seats can be slid upto the cargo area trim with the clip.This helps avoid annoying noises when driving.

MINI Countryman: center safety belt ofrear seatThe belt buckle embossed with the word CEN‐TER is intended exclusively for use by passen‐gers riding in the center position.If the center safety belt in the rear is used, thebackrests must be locked, refer to page 101.The safety belt will not have a restraining effectif the backrest is not locked.

Belt holder in the headlinerThe holder for the safety belt is located in theheadliner.

1 Opening for the safety belt2 Holder for the small buckle tongue

Take the small buckle tongue out of the holder.Move both buckle tongues downward.

Closing

Insert the small buckle tongue 2 of the safetybelt into the small belt buckle 3.

OpeningPress the red button on the small belt buckle 3with buckle tongue 1.When the center safety belt is locked:Press the red button 3 with the buckle tongueof the outer left safety belt.

Seite 38

CONTROLS Adjusting

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 41: 2015 countryman

Putting on the belt

1 Large buckle tongue2 Small buckle tongue3 Small belt buckle4 Large belt buckle

Buckle tongue 1 must be inserted in beltbuckle 4. Make sure you hear the buckletongue engage in the belt buckle.Insert the buckle tongue into the belt buckle insuch a way that the belt lies smoothly againstthe body of the buckled person and is nottwisted.

Stowing the center safety beltIf the center seat is not occupied, insert the beltbuckles 3 and 4 into the respective holders, ar‐rows.

Move the buckle tongues to the belt holder onthe headliner, refer to page 38, and insert theminto the provided holders.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seatand front passenger seat

The indicator lamps light up and a sig‐nal sounds. Check whether the safetybelt has been fastened correctly.

Damage to safety beltsIn the case of strain caused by accidents ordamage:Have the safety belts, including the safety belttensioners, replaced and have the belt anchorschecked.

Checking and replacing safety beltsHave the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensuredthat this safety feature will function properly.◀

Head restraintsCorrectly set head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraintCorrectly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increasedrisk of injury in an accident.◀

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center isapprox. at ear level.MINI Countryman: the center rear head re‐straint is not height adjustable.

Seite 39

Adjusting CONTROLS

39Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 42: 2015 countryman

Height adjustment

To raise: pull.To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and pushthe head restraint down until it engages.MINI Countryman: additionally press button 2on the rear head restraints only if you wish toremove them.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no one will besitting in the seat in question.

Before transporting passengersReinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐able.◀

Front1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.2. MINI Countryman: tilt the backrest back

slightly.

MINI Paceman: fold the backrest forward ifnecessary.

3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re‐straint all the way to the stop.MINI Countryman: additionally press but‐ton 2 using a suitable tool.

4. Pull out the head restraint.5. Fold back the backrest.

Rear1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re‐

straint all the way to the stop.MINI Countryman: additionally press but‐ton 2 using a suitable tool.

4. Pull out the head restraint completely.5. Fold back the rear seat backrest.

MirrorsExterior mirrors

General informationThe mirror on the passenger side is morecurved than the driver's mirror.

Estimating distances correctlyObjects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distanceto the traffic behind you based on what you seein the mirror, as this will increase your risk of anaccident.◀

Seite 40

CONTROLS Adjusting

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 43: 2015 countryman

At a glance

1 Adjusting2 Selecting the left/right mirror3 Folding the mirror in and out

Selecting a mirrorTo change to the other mirror: slide themirror switch over.

Adjusting electricallyThe setting corresponds to the directionin which the button is pressed.

Adjusting manuallyIf an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,press the edges of the mirror glass.

Folding the mirror in and outPress button 3.The mirror can be folded in up to a vehiclespeed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.For example, this is advantageous▷ In car washes.▷ In narrow streets.▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually.

Fold in the mirror in a car washBefore entering an automatic car wash,

fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with thebutton; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐pending on the width of the vehicle.◀

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are heated automaticallywhile the engine is running or the ignition isswitched on when the external temperature isbelow a certain value.

Interior rearview mirror

To reduce the blinding effect from the rearwhen driving at night: turn the knob.

Interior rearview and exterior mirrors,automatic dimming feature

Two photocells are used for control:▷ In the mirror frame, see arrow.▷ On the back of the mirror.

For proper operation:▷ Keep the photocells clean.

Seite 41

Adjusting CONTROLS

41Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 44: 2015 countryman

▷ Do not cover the area between the insiderearview mirror and the windshield.

▷ Do not apply stickers to the windshield infront of the mirror.

Steering wheelAdjusting

Do not adjust while drivingDo not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movementcould result in an accident.◀

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferredheight and angle to suit your seating posi‐tion.

3. Fold the lever back.Do not use force to swing the lever back.Do not use force to swing the lever back

up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐aged.◀

Seite 42

CONTROLS Adjusting

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 45: 2015 countryman

Transporting children safelyVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

The right place for chil‐drenNotes

Children in the vehicleDo not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐selves and other persons, e.g., by opening thedoors.◀

Children should always be in the rearAccident research shows that the safest placefor children is on the rear seat.

Transporting children in the rearTransport children younger than 13 years

of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rearonly, using child restraint fixing systems suita‐ble for the age, weight, and height of the child;otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury inan accident.Children 13 years of age or older must wear asafety belt as soon as a suitable child restraintfixing system can no longer be used, due totheir age, weight and size.◀

Installing child seatsOnly install child seats in the rear when

the rear seat backrest is folded all the way backand engaged; otherwise, there is an increasedrisk of injury in an accident.◀

Children on the front passenger seat

Front passenger airbagsShould it be necessary to use a child restraintfixing system on the front passenger seat,make sure that the front and side airbags onthe front passenger side are deactivated, referto page 72.

Deactivating the front passenger airbagsIf a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passengerairbags must be deactivated; otherwise, thereis an increased risk of injury to the child whenthe airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐straint fixing system.◀

Installing child re‐straint fixing systemsBefore mountingMINI Countryman: before mounting a child re‐straint fixing system on the rear seats, movethe seats into the rearmost positions.Adjust the inclination of the center backrest tothat of the respective outer backrest.After mounting the child restraint fixing systemon the respective outer rear seat, adjust thebackrest forward, if necessary, to ensure thatthe backrest is in contact with the child re‐straint fixing system. Rear seat backrests, referto page 100.

Seite 43

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

43Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 46: 2015 countryman

NotesManufacturer's information for child re‐straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixingsystems, observe the information provided bythe system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐tective effect can be impaired.◀

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating the airbagsAfter installing a child restraint fixing system onthe front passenger seat, ensure that the front,side, and knee airbags on the front passengerside are deactivated.

Deactivating the front passenger airbagsIf a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passengerairbags must be deactivated; otherwise, thereis an increased risk of injury to the child whenthe airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐straint fixing system.◀

Seat position and heightBefore installing a child restraint fixing system,move the front passenger seat as far back aspossible and adjust its height to the highest po‐sition to obtain the best possible position forthe belt and to offer optimal protection in theevent of an accident.Do not change this seat position once it hasbeen set.

Child seat security

The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as anexample.The rear safety belts and the safety belt for thefront passenger can be locked to prevent ex‐tension in order to permit attachment of childrestraint fixing systems.

To lock the safety belt1. Secure the child restraint fixing system with

the belt.2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixingsystem.

The safety belt is locked.

To unlock the safety belt1. Open the belt buckle.2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐

pletely.Center safety belt: unlock belt buckle 3 inaddition, refer to page 39.Guide the safety belt to the holder on theheadliner.

LATCH child restraint fix‐ing systemLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.

Seite 44

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 47: 2015 countryman

NotesManufacturer's information for LATCHchild restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐ing systems, observe the operating and safetyinformation from the system manufacturer;otherwise, the level of protection may be re‐duced.◀

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchorsThe lower anchors may be used to attach theCRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined childand CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child isrestrained by the internal harnesses.

Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors haveproperly engaged and that the child restraintfixing system is resting snugly against the back‐rest; otherwise, the degree of protection of‐fered may be reduced.◀

Before installing the child seat, pull the belt outof the area for the child restraint fixing system.

MINI Countryman

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors arelocated at the points indicated by the arrows.

MINI Paceman

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors arelocated at the points indicated by the arrows.

The corresponding symbol shows themounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixingsystems1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐

fer to the operating instructions of the sys‐tem.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐erly connected.

Child restraint fixingsystems with an upper re‐taining strapMounting points

LATCH mounting pointsOnly use the mounting points for the up‐

per LATCH retaining strap to secure child re‐straint systems; otherwise, the mounting pointscould be damaged.◀

Seite 45

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

45Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 48: 2015 countryman

MINI Countryman

There are two additional mounting points forchild restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐taining strap, arrows.

MINI Paceman

There are two additional mounting points forchild restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐taining strap, arrows.

Guide of the upper LATCH retainingstrap

Retaining strapMake sure the upper retaining strap does

not run over sharp edges and is not twisted asit passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, thestrap will not properly secure the child restraintfixing system in the event of an accident.◀

Outer seats:

1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint3 Cargo area floor4 Hook for upper retaining strap5 Mounting point6 Backrest7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐

ing system

MINI Countryman, center seat

1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint3 Hook for upper retaining strap4 Mounting point5 Cargo area floor6 Backrest7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐

ing system

Seite 46

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 49: 2015 countryman

Attaching the upper retaining strap tothe mounting point1. Slide the head restraint upward.2. Center seat: fold the cargo area floor for‐

ward.3. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint.4. Attach the upper retaining strap to the

mounting point with the hook.5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐

sition.6. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.

MINI Countryman: lock‐ing doors and windowsRear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.The door can now be opened from the outsideonly.

Safety switch for power windowThis locks the rear window switches so that thewindows cannot be operated from the rear.Press the safety switch, refer to page 34.

Seite 47

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

47Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 50: 2015 countryman

DrivingVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Ignition lockInsert the remote control into theignition lock

Insert the remote control all the way into theignition lock.

Radio ready state is switched on. Individualelectrical consumers can operate.

Removing the remote control from theignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote controlout of the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out ofthe ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀

Before removing the remote control, push it allthe way in to release the locking mechanism.The ignition is switched off if it was on.

Steptronic transmissionYou can only take out the remote control iftransmission position P is engaged: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐nition on or off and starts the engine.

The engine starts when the Start/Stop button ispressed and:▷ Manual transmission: the clutch pedal is de‐

pressed.▷ Steptronic transmission: the brake pedal is

depressed.

Radio ready stateIndividual electrical consumers can operate.Radio ready state is switched off automatically:▷ When the remote control is removed from

the ignition lock.▷ With Comfort Access, refer to page 28, by

pressing the button on the door handle or

the button on the remote control.▷ After a certain period of time.

Seite 48

CONTROLS Driving

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 51: 2015 countryman

Ignition onAll electrical consumers can operate. Most indi‐cator and warning lights light up for differentlengths of time.To save battery power when the engine is off,switch off the ignition and any unnecessaryelectronic systems/power consumers.

Radio ready state and ignition offAll indicator and warning lights in the displaysgo out.The ignition switches off automatically whenthe driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches the ignition backon.For example, the ignition is not switched off inthe following situations:▷ Depress the clutch or brake pedal.▷ The low beams are switched on.

Starting the engineGeneral information

Enclosed areasDo not let the engine run in enclosed

areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumesmay lead to loss of consciousness and death.The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀

Unattended vehicleDo not leave the car unattended with the

engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐tial source of danger.Before leaving the car with the engine running,shift to neutral or engage transmission posi‐tion P and set the parking brake firmly; other‐wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀

Frequent starting in quick successionAvoid repeated futile attempts at starting

the car and avoid starting the car frequently inquick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is notburned or is inadequately burned, and there isthe danger of overheating and damaging thecatalytic converter.◀

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary; start drivingright away, but at moderate engine speeds.Do not depress the accelerator when startingthe engine.

Starting the engine

Manual transmissionRemote control in the ignition lock or withComfort Access inside the vehicle, refer topage 28.

1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Depress the clutch pedal.3. Press the Start/Stop button.The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐tain time and is stopped as soon as the enginestarts.

Steptronic transmissionRemote control in the ignition lock or, withComfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer topage 28.

1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Move the selector lever to position P or N.

Seite 49

Driving CONTROLS

49Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 52: 2015 countryman

3. Press the Start/Stop button.The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐tain time and is stopped as soon as the enginestarts.

Engine stopGeneral information

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ple, cannot operate the windows and injurethemselves.◀

Set the parking brake and further securethe vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐erwise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upwardand downward inclines, further secure the ve‐hicle, for example, by turning the steeringwheel in the direction of the curb.◀

Before driving into a car washTo make it possible for the vehicle to roll in anautomatic car wash, follow the information onWashing in automatic car washes, refer topage 186.

Switching off the engine

Manual transmission1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button.2. Shift into first gear or reverse.3. Set the parking brake firmly.4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐

tion lock.

Steptronic transmission1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐

hicle stopped.2. Press the Start/Stop button.3. Set the parking brake firmly.4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐

tion lock.

Parking brakeThe conceptThe parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; itbrakes the rear wheels.Also follow the instructions under Switching offthe engine, refer to page 50.

SettingThe lever engages automatically.

Releasing

Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower thelever.

NotesUsing the parking brake while drivingIf it should become necessary to use the

parking brake while driving, do not pull theparking brake too forcefully. Keep the buttonon the parking brake lever pressed at all times.

Seite 50

CONTROLS Driving

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 53: 2015 countryman

Excessive application of the parking brake canblock the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing ofthe vehicle.◀

The brake lights do not light up when the park‐ing brake is pulled.

Turn signal, high-beams,headlight flasher

1 Turn signal2 Switching on the high-beams3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight

flasher

Turn signalPress the lever beyond the resistance point.To switch off manually, press the lever to theresistance point.Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lampindicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Signaling a turn brieflyPress the lever to the resistance point and holdit there for as long as you want the turn signalto flash.

Triple turn signal activationPress the lever to the resistance point.The turn signal flashes three times.

This function can be activated or deactivated:

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 49.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to select:

Seite 51

Driving CONTROLS

51Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 54: 2015 countryman

▷ Turn signal flashes once.

▷ Triple turn signal.

9. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Washer/wiper systemNotes

Do not switch on the wipers if frozenDo not switch on the wipers if they are

frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, thewiper blades and the windshield wiper motormay be damaged.◀

Do not use the wipers on a dry windshieldDo not use the wipers on a dry wind‐

shield; otherwise, the wiper blades may wearmore rapidly or become damaged.◀

At a glance

1 Switching on wipers2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or

the rain sensor4 Cleaning the windshield and headlights

Switching on wipersPress the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.

Normal wiper speedPress up once.The system switches to operation in the inter‐mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speedPress up twice or press once beyond the resist‐ance point.The system switches to normal speed when thevehicle is stationary.

Switching off wipers or brief wipePress the wiper lever down, arrow 2.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Brief wipe: press down once.▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down

once.▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensorIf the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, theintermittent-wipe time is a preset.If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, thetime between wipes is controlled automaticallyand depends on the intensity of the rainfall.The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washesDeactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise,damage could be caused by undesired wiperactivation.◀

Seite 52

CONTROLS Driving

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 55: 2015 countryman

Activating intermittent wipe or rainsensorPress the button, arrow 3.

The symbol is shown in the tachometer.

Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 49.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button to select the desired sensi‐tivity.

7. Wait or hold the button until the displaychanges.The settings were stored.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rainsensorPress the button again, arrow 3.

Cleaning the windshield and headlightsPull the lever, arrow 4.The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐shield and activates the wipers briefly.When the vehicle lighting system is switchedon, the headlights are cleaned at regular andappropriate intervals.

Do not use the washer system at freezingtemperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any dangerthat the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐erwise, your vision could be obscured. For thisreason, use antifreeze.Avoid using the washer when the reservoir isempty; otherwise, you could damage thepump.◀

Seite 53

Driving CONTROLS

53Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 56: 2015 countryman

Do not use the washing facilities whenthe hood is open

Only use the washing facilities when the hoodis fully locked; otherwise, the headlamp washersystem may become damaged.◀

Windshield washer nozzlesThe windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐tomatically while the engine is running or theignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

0 Resting position1 Switching on intermittent wipe

Turn the cap to level 1.When reverse gear is engaged, the systemswitches to continuous operation.

2 Cleaning the rear window with intermittentwipeTurn the cap further to level 2 and hold.

3 Cleaning the rear window in the resting po‐sitionTurn the cap to level 3 and hold.

The rear window wiper does not move if thecap is in position 1 before the ignition isswitched on.To switch on the rear window wiper:

1. Move the cap to its basic position.2. Select the required position again.

Do not use the washing mechanismswhen the washer fluid reservoir is empty

Do not use washing mechanisms when thewasher fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise youwill damage the washer pump.◀

Washer fluidGeneral information

Antifreeze for washer fluidAntifreeze is flammable and can cause in‐

juries if used improperly.Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐tion.Only keep it in the closed original container andinaccessible to children.Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐tainer.United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio isregulated by the U.S. EPA and many individualstates; do not exceed the allowable washerfluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow theusage instructions on the washer fluid con‐tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Concen‐trate or the equivalent.◀

Washer fluid reservoirAdding washer fluidOnly add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely toavoid contact between the washer fluid andhot engine parts.Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a riskto personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀

Seite 54

CONTROLS Driving

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 57: 2015 countryman

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐voir.

The recommended minimum filling quantity is0.2 US gal/1 liter.Fill with a mixture of window washing concen‐trate and water; if needed, add antifreeze ac‐cording to the manufacturer instructions.Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintainthe correct mixing ratio.Do not fill in undiluted window washing con‐centrate and do not fill in pure water; this coulddamage the washer system.Do not mix window washing concentrate fromdifferent manufacturers; this could cause thewasher nozzles to clog.

Manual transmission

Pay attention to the shift planeWhen shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear couldlead to engine damage.◀

Reverse gearSelect only when the vehicle is stationary. Whenthe gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slightresistance needs to be overcome.

Steptronic transmissionIn addition to the fully automatic mode, gearscan also be shifted manually using Steptronic,refer to page 56.

Parking the vehicleSecure the vehicleBefore leaving the vehicle with the en‐

gine running, move the selector lever to posi‐tion P and set the handbrake; otherwise, thevehicle will begin moving.◀

Disengaging the remote controlTo remove the remote control from the ignitionlock, first move the selector lever to position Pand switch off the engine: interlock. Removethe remote control from the ignition lock, referto page 48.

Selector lever positionsP R N D M/S + –

Displays in the tachometer

The selector lever position is displayed and theengaged gear, such as M4, is displayed inmanual mode.

Seite 55

Driving CONTROLS

55Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 58: 2015 countryman

Changing selector lever positions▷ With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, the selector lever can be movedout of position P.

▷ When the vehicle is stationary, step on thebrake before shifting out of P or N; other‐wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.

Press on the brake pedal until youstart driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a driving position, maintain pres‐sure on the brake pedal until you are readyto start.◀

A lock prevents accidental shifting into selectorlever positions R and P.To override the lock, press the button on thefront of the selector lever, see arrow.

P ParkSelect only when the vehicle is stationary. Thefront wheels are blocked.

R is ReverseSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is NeutralFor example, engage this position in a carwash. The vehicle can roll.

D DrivePosition for normal vehicle operation. All for‐ward gears are selected automatically.

Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐sition D.

KickdownKickdown is used to achieve maximum drivingperformance. Press on the accelerator beyondthe resistance point at the full throttle position.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the Sport program

Move the selector lever from position D towardthe left into the M/S shifting slot.

The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐played. This position is recommended for a per‐formance-oriented driving style.To deactivate the Sport program or manualmode M/S, move the selector lever to the rightinto position D.

Activating the M/S manual modeMove the selector lever from position D towardthe left into the M/S shifting slot.Push the selector lever forward or backward.Manual mode becomes active and the gear ischanged.The tachometer displays the engaged gear,e. g. M1.▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐

ward.▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

ward.

Seite 56

CONTROLS Driving

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 59: 2015 countryman

The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does notshift down if the engine speed is too high. Theselected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐ment panel, followed by the current gear.

Shifting gears using the shift paddleson the steering wheelThe shift paddles on the steering wheel allowyou to shift gears quickly while keeping bothhands on the steering wheel.▷ When the shift paddles on the steering

wheel are used to shift gears while in auto‐matic mode, the transmission switches tomanual mode.

▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐ate or shift gears for a certain amount oftime, the transmission switches back to au‐tomatic mode.

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane,manual mode remains active.

▷ Pull one of the two shift paddles:The transmission shifts up.

▷ Press one of the two shift paddles:The transmission shifts down.

The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does notshift down if the engine speed is too high. Theselected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐ment panel, followed by the current gear.

Manually unlocking the selector leverlockIf the selector lever is locked in position P al‐though the ignition is switched on, the brake isdepressed, and the button on the selector leveris pressed, the selector lever lock can be over‐ridden:

1. Switch off the ignition.2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever

until the sleeve is inside out.Pull off the plug-in cable connector if nec‐essary.

4. Insert the pulling hook 1 into the loop onthe passenger side.The pulling hook is found in the vehicledocument portfolio or in the pouch of thewheel change set, refer to page 178.

5. Pull the loop upward.6. Move the selector lever into the desired po‐

sition, pressing the button on the front ofthe selector lever.

Set the parking brakeManually unlock the selector lever lock

for towing only. Before manually unlocking theselector lever lock, pull the parking brakefirmly; otherwise, the vehicle may roll away andcause personal injury or property damage.◀

Seite 57

Driving CONTROLS

57Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 60: 2015 countryman

DisplaysVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Odometer, external tem‐perature display, clockAt a glance

1 Current speed2 Odometer, trip odometer, external temper‐

ature, time3 Resetting the trip odometer

Press the button on the turn indicator lever toopen information in display area 2.The following information is displayed consecu‐tively:▷ Trip odometer▷ Time▷ External temperature

Trip odometer

Displaying the trip odometerPress button 3 briefly.

Resetting the trip odometer1. Press button 3 briefly.

The trip odometer is displayed.2. Press button 3 again.

The trip odometer is reset.

TimeSet the time, refer to page 62.

External temperature, externaltemperature warningIf the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signalsounds and a warning light lights up. There isthe increased danger of ice.

Ice on roadsEven at temperatures above

+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice onroads.Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shadyroads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐ger of an accident.◀

Units of measureTo set the respective units of measure, miles orkm for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the exter‐nal temperature, refer to page 61.

Seite 58

CONTROLS Displays

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 61: 2015 countryman

Tachometer

It is imperative that you avoid engine speeds inthe red warning field. In this range, the fuelsupply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperatureA warning lamp will come on if the coolant, andtherefore the engine, becomes too hot.Check the coolant level, refer to page 168.

Fuel gauge

The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on thefuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle withthe fuel filler flap.The vehicle inclination may cause the display tovary.

Notes on refueling, refer to page 148.Filling capacities, refer to page 209.

RangeAfter the reserve range is reached:

▷ The remaining LEDs change from orange tored, arrow.

▷ The remaining range is shown on the tach‐ometer.

▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, suchas when corners are taken rapidly, enginefunctions are not ensured.

A warning light lights up below a range of ap‐prox. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptlyAt the latest, refuel at a range below

30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine functionis not ensured and damage may occur.◀

ComputerOpening information in the tachometer

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

Overview of the informationThe following information is displayed consecu‐tively by repeatedly pressing the button on theturn indicator lever:▷ Range.▷ Average fuel consumption.▷ Current fuel consumption.▷ Average speed.To set the corresponding units of measure, re‐fer to page 61.

Seite 59

Displays CONTROLS

59Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 62: 2015 countryman

Information in detail

RangeDisplays the estimated cruising range availablewith the remaining fuel.It is calculated based on your driving style overthe last 18 miles/30 km.

Average fuel consumptionThis is calculated for the period during whichthe engine is running.To reset the average consumption: press thebutton on the turn indicator lever for ap‐prox. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumptionDisplays the current fuel consumption. You cancheck whether you are currently driving in anefficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Average speedPeriods in which the vehicle was parked andthe engine was switched off manually are notincluded in the average speed calculations.To reset the average speed: press the buttonon the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec‐onds.

Radio MINI Boost CD: displays on theradioSome computer functions can also be shownon the radio display, refer to page 125.

Settings and informationOperating conceptSome settings and information can only be cre‐ated or opened while the ignition is switchedon, the vehicle is standing, and the doors areclosed.

1 Button for:▷ Selecting the display.▷ Setting values.▷ Confirming the selected display or set

values.▷ Calling up computer information  59.

Symbol Function

Set the rain sensor, refer topage 52.

Open Check-Control, refer topage 64.

View service requirement dis‐play, refer to page 63.

Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor,refer to page 74.Resetting the Tire PressureMonitor, refer to page 77.

Set the formats and units ofmeasure, reset to the factorysettings, refer to page 61.

Seite 60

CONTROLS Displays

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 63: 2015 countryman

Symbol Function

Personal Profile settings, referto page 20.

Exit the menu.

Exiting displays

1. Press the button on the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.

2. Hold the button down.The current speed is displayed again.Displays are also exited if no entries are madewithin approx. 8 seconds.

Next setting or information

1. Within a setting or information display,press the button on the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.

2. Hold the button down.Direct change to the next setting or piece of in‐formation.

Formats and units ofmeasureThe formats and units of measure can be set.The settings are stored for the remote controlin use.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol shown is displayed, arrow.▷ Fuel consumption: l/100 km, mpg,

km/l

Seite 61

Displays CONTROLS

61Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 64: 2015 countryman

▷ Distance: km, mi.▷ Temperature: ℃, ℉

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to change the format orthe unit of measure.

9. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.The settings are stored.

Resetting to factory settingsThe settings for formats and units of measurecan be reset to the factory settings. The settingsare stored for the remote control in use.

1. Press the button on the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

2. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

4. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

5. Press the button repeatedly until "RESET"appears on the display.

6. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges to the first setting option.The settings are reset.

ClockSetting the timeRadio MINI Boost CD: set the time, refer topage 124.

DateSetting the dateRadio MINI Boost CD: set the date, refer topage 124.

Seite 62

CONTROLS Displays

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 65: 2015 countryman

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date ofthe next scheduled service are displayed brieflyimmediately after you start the engine orswitch on the ignition.

The current service requirements can be readout from the remote control by the service spe‐cialist.

Displaying the vehicle checkFor certain maintenance operations, you canview the distance remaining or the due date forthat operation in the tachometer.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐sponding symbol and "SERVICE-INFO" aredisplayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button to display the individualservice requirement items.

Possible displays

1 Button for selecting the information.

Symbol Function

Service requirements

Engine oil

Seite 63

Displays CONTROLS

63Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 66: 2015 countryman

Symbol Function

Roadworthiness test

Front brake pads

Rear brake pads

Brake fluid

Exit the display, refer topage 61

Next setting or information, re‐fer to page 61

Check ControlThe conceptThe Check Control monitors vehicle functionsand alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐tems being monitored.A Check Control message consists of indicatorand warning lamps in the instrument clusterand, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal.

Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up ina variety of combinations and colors in displayarea 1 or 2.

Several of the lamps are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily when theengine is started or the ignition is switched on.

The symbol indicates that Check Controlmessages have been stored. The Check Controlmessages can be displayed later.

What to do in case of a malfunctionThe meaning of each lamp in the event of amalfunction and tips on how to respond areprovided in the list, refer to page 191.

Seite 64

CONTROLS Displays

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 67: 2015 countryman

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayedcontinuously and are not cleared until the mal‐function is eliminated. If several malfunctionsoccur at once, the messages are displayed con‐secutively.Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However,they are stored and can be displayed againlater.

Viewing stored Check Control messagesThe stored Check Control messages can only bedisplayed while the driver's door is closed.

1. Press the button on the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

2. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐sponding symbol and "CHECK INFO" ap‐pear on the display.

4. Press and hold the button.If there is no Check Control message, this isindicated by "CHECK OK".If a Check Control message has beenstored, the corresponding message is dis‐played.

5. Press the button to check for other mes‐sages.

Seite 65

Displays CONTROLS

65Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 68: 2015 countryman

LampsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

At a glance

0 Lamps off / daytime running lights1 Parking lights and daytime running lights2 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights3 Automatic headlight control, Adaptive Light

Control, daytime running lights, and wel‐come lights

Parking lights/lowbeams, headlight con‐trolGeneral informationWhen the driver's door is opened with the igni‐tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto‐

matically switched off when the light switch isin position 0, 2, or 3.Switch on the parking lights if necessary, switchposition 1.

Parking lightsSwitch position 1: the vehicle lights light up onall sides.Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐charged and it would then be impossible tostart the engine.When parking, it is preferable to switch on theone-sided roadside parking lights, refer topage 67.

Low beamsSwitch position 2: the low beams are lit whenthe ignition is switched on.

Automatic headlight controlSwitch position 3: the low beams are switchedon and off automatically depending on the am‐bient light, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight, or ifthere is precipitation. Adaptive Light Control isactive.A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon cancause the lights to be switched on.The low beams remain switched on independ‐ent of the ambient lighting conditions whenyou switch on the front fog lights.

Personal responsibilityThe automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ment in determining when the lamps should beswitched on in response to ambient lightingconditions.

Seite 66

CONTROLS Lamps

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 69: 2015 countryman

For example, the sensors are unable to detectfog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, youshould always switch on the lamps manuallyunder these conditions.◀

The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐ter the vehicle is switched off.

High-beams/roadside parking lights

1 Turn signal/roadside parking light2 Switching on the high-beams3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight

flasher

To assist in parking, the vehicle can be illumi‐nated on one side; note the country-specificregulations.The roadside parking lights drain the battery.Therefore, do not leave them on for undulylong periods of time; otherwise, the batterymight not have enough power to start the en‐gine.

Switching on the roadside parking lightTo switch on the roadside parking light on theleft or right, press the turn indicator lever up ordown after switching off the vehicle, arrow 1.

Switching off the roadside parking lightPress the lever up or down to the resistancepoint.

Daytime running lightsThe daytime running lights light up in switchposition 0, 1, or 3 when the ignition is switchedon.The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐ter the vehicle is switched off.In switch position 1, the parking lights light upafter the ignition is switched off.

Activating/deactivatingIn some countries, driving with daytime run‐ning lights is mandatory; for this reason, day‐time running lights cannot be deactivated inthese cases.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

Seite 67

Lamps CONTROLS

67Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 70: 2015 countryman

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to select:▷

Daytime running lights are activated.▷

Daytime running lights are deactivated.9. Hold the button down.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Welcome lightsIf the light switch stays in switch position 2 or 3after the vehicle is switched off, the parkinglights and the interior lights light up for a cer‐tain period when the vehicle is unlocked.

Headlight courtesy delay featureThe low beams stay lit for a short while afterthe ignition is switched off, if the lights areswitched off and the headlight flasher isswitched on.

Setting the duration1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to select:▷

The function is deactivated.▷ ...

Select the duration, e.g. 40 seconds.9. Hold the button down.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Adaptive Light ControlThe conceptAdaptive Light Control is a variable headlightcontrol system that enables dynamic illumina‐tion of the road surface.

Seite 68

CONTROLS Lamps

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 71: 2015 countryman

Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐rameters, the light from the headlight followsthe course of the road.

ActivatingWith the ignition switch on, turn the light switchto position 3, refer to page 66.To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐tive Light Control does not swivel to the driver'sside when the vehicle is at a standstill.When driving in reverse, Adaptive Light Controlis not active.

MalfunctionThe warning light lights up. AdaptiveLight Control is malfunctioning or hasfailed. Have the system checked as

soon as possible.More information, refer to page 191.

Fog lightsAt a glance

To switch on the front fog lights: press theswitch.To switch off, press the respective switch up‐ward or downward again.

Fog lightsThe parking lights or low beams must beswitched on. The green indicator lamp lights upwhen the front fog lights are switched on.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the frontfog lights are switched off when the headlightflasher or the high-beams are activated.If the automatic headlight control is activated,refer to page 66, the low beams are switchedon automatically when the front fog lights areswitched on.

Instrument lightingThe parking lights or low beams must beswitched on to adjust the brightness. Thebrightness is increased to a certain limit and isthen reduced again.

▷ Press the button briefly: the brightnesschanges in stages.

▷ Press and hold the button: the brightnesschanges continuously.

Interior lightsThe interior lights, the footwell lights and thecargo area light are controlled automatically.To avoid draining the battery, all lights insidethe vehicle are switched off some time after theignition is switched off.

Seite 69

Lamps CONTROLS

69Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 72: 2015 countryman

Switching interior lights on/offmanually

To switch the interior lights on/off: press theswitch.

If the interior lights are to remain switched off,press the switch for approx. 3 seconds.

Reading lightsReading lights are located in the front next tothe interior light and in the rear.

Switching the reading lights on/offFront: press the switch.Rear: press the button.

Ambient lightingThe color and brightness of the ambient light‐ing can be changed.

Press the switch forward: the color changes insteps.Press the switch back: the brightness changesin steps.

Intermediate settings and intermediate colorsare possible.For continuously changing colors of the ambi‐ent lighting, press the switch forward for morethan 10 seconds.For Canadian vehicles:Continuously changing colors of the ambientlighting is not available.

Seite 70

CONTROLS Lamps

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 73: 2015 countryman

SafetyVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.

When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

AirbagsThe graphic shows the MINI Paceman as an ex‐ample.

1 Front airbags2 Knee airbag

3 Side airbag4 Head airbags

Front airbagsFront airbags help protect the driver and frontpassenger by responding to frontal impacts inwhich safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐quate restraint.

Side airbagsIn a lateral impact, the side airbag supports theside of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbagsIn a lateral impact, the head airbag supportsthe head.

Knee airbagThe knee airbag supports the legs in a frontalimpact.

Seite 71

Safety CONTROLS

71Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 74: 2015 countryman

Protective actionAirbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-endcollisions.

Information on how to ensure the opti‐mal protective effect of the airbags

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands atthe 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, tokeep the danger of injury to your hands orarms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐gered.

▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐jects between an airbag and a person.

▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag onthe front passenger side as a storage area.

▷ Keep the dashboard and window on thefront passenger side clear, i.e., do not coverwith adhesive labels or coverings, and donot attach holders or cables such as fornavigation instruments and mobile phones.

▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sittingcorrectly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legsin the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries canoccur if the front airbag is triggered.

▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions orother objects on the front passenger seatthat are not approved specifically for seatswith integrated side airbags.

▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such asjackets, over the backrests.

▷ Make sure that occupants keep their headsaway from the side airbag and do not restagainst the head airbag; otherwise, injuriescan occur if the airbags are triggered.

▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

bag cover panels, cover them or modifythem in any way.

▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐nents or the wiring in the airbag system.This also applies to steering wheel covers,the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillarsand the sides of the headliner.◀

Even when all instructions are followed closely,injury from contact with the airbags cannot beruled out in certain situations.The ignition and inflation noise may lead toshort-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivationand after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme‐diately after the system has been triggered;otherwise, there is the danger of burns.Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐mantled and the airbag generator scrapped byyour service center or a workshop that has thenecessary authorization for handling explo‐sives.Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐tem could lead to failure in an emergency orundesired triggering of the airbag, either ofwhich could result in injury.◀

Warning notices and information about the air‐bags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the frontpassenger airbagsThe system determines whether the front pas‐senger seat is occupied by measuring the elec‐trical resistance of the human body.The front, side, and knee airbags on the frontpassenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐cordingly by the system.The indicator lamp above the interior rearviewmirror, refer to page 73, shows the currentstatus of the front passenger airbags, deacti‐vated or activated.

Seite 72

CONTROLS Safety

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 75: 2015 countryman

Leave feet in the footwellMake sure that the front passenger keeps

his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, thefront passenger airbags may not function prop‐erly.◀

Child restraint fixing system in the frontpassenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ger seat, read the safety and operating instruc‐tions under Transporting children safely, referto page 43.◀

Malfunction of the automaticdeactivation systemWhen transporting older children and adults,the front passenger airbags may be deactivatedin certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐cator lamp for the front passenger airbagslights up.In this case, change the sitting position so thatthe front passenger airbags are activated andthe indicator lamp goes out.If it is not possible to activate the airbags, havethe person sit in the rear.To make sure that occupation of the seat cush‐ion can be detected correctly:▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion

padding, ball mats, or other items to thefront passenger seat unless they are specifi‐cally recommended by the manufacturer ofyour MINI.

▷ Do not place electronic devices on the pas‐senger seat if a child restraint fixing systemis mounted on the seat.

▷ Do not place objects under the seat thatcould press against the seat from below.

Indicator light for the front passengerairbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐bags indicates the operating state of the frontpassenger airbags.The light indicates whether the airbags are acti‐vated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights upwhen a child who is properlyseated in a child restraint fix‐ing system intended for thatpurpose is detected on theseat or the seat is empty. Theairbags on the front passen‐ger side are not activated.

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,for example, a correctly seated person ofsufficient size is detected on the seat. Theairbags on the front passenger side are ac‐tivated.

Most child seats are detected by the system.Especially the child seats required by NHTSA atthe time that the vehicle was manufactured.After installing a child seat, make sure that theindicator lamp for the front passenger airbagslights up. This indicates that the child seat hasbeen detected and the front passenger airbagsare not activated.

Seite 73

Safety CONTROLS

73Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 76: 2015 countryman

Operational readiness of airbag system

In the radio ready state and beyond, re‐fer to page 48, the warning light lightsup briefly to indicate that the entire air‐

bag system and the belt tensioners are opera‐tional.

Airbag system malfunction▷ Warning light does not light up in the radio

ready state.▷ Warning light remains permanently on.

Have the airbag system checked withoutdelay if there is a malfunction

In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise,there is the risk that the system will not func‐tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe ac‐cident occurs.◀

FTM Flat Tire MonitorThe conceptThe system does not measure the actual infla‐tion pressure in the tires.The system detects a pressure loss in a tire bycomparing the rotational speeds of the individ‐ual wheels while moving.In the event of a pressure loss, the diameterand therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐sponding wheel change. This is detected andreported as a flat tire.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been initialized whenthe tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐sured.Initialize the system after each correction of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.

System limitsSudden tire damageSudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐vance.◀

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tirescannot be detected. Therefore, check the tireinflation pressure regularly.The system could be delayed or malfunction inthe following situations:▷ When the system has not been initialized.▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface.▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,

high lateral acceleration.▷ When driving with snow chains.

InitializationThe initialization process adopts the set infla‐tion tire pressures as reference values for thedetection of a flat tire. Initialization is started byconfirming the inflation pressures.

Seite 74

CONTROLS Safety

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 77: 2015 countryman

Do not initialize the system when driving withsnow chains.

1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐sponding symbol and "RESET" are dis‐played.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Drive away.Initialization is completed while the car istraveling without feedback being given.

Indication of a flat tireThe warning lights come on in yellowand red. In addition, a signal sounds.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflationpressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withregular tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 160, are la‐beled with a circular symbol containing theletters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flattires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued drivingmay result in serious accidents.◀

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐bility Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the inflation pressure inall four tires.The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 161, can be used for thispurpose.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Flat Tire Monitor may not havebeen initialized. In this case, initialize thesystem.If an identification is not possible, pleasecontact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 161.

Run-flat tiresYou can continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Seite 75

Safety CONTROLS

75Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 78: 2015 countryman

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation

pressure in all four tires.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Flat Tire Monitor may not havebeen initialized. In this case, initialize thesystem.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on the cargo loadand the driving style and conditions.For a vehicle containing an average load, thepossible driving distance is ap‐prox. 50 miles/80 km.When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance, and altered self-steeringproperties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance dependson how the vehicle is used during the trip, theactual distance may be smaller or greater de‐pending on the driving speed, road conditions,external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tireDrive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.A loss of tire inflation pressure results in achange in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance and altered self-steering prop‐erties.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reducespeed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tirecould come loose and cause an accident. Donot continue driving, and contact your servicecenter.◀

Tire Pressure MonitorTPMThe conceptThe system monitors the tire pressure in thefour mounted tires. The system notifies you ifthere is a significant loss of pressure in one ormore tires. Sensors in the tire valves measurethe tire pressure.

NotesTire damage caused by external influen‐ces

Sudden tire damage caused by external influ‐ences cannot be indicated in advance.◀

To operate the system, also note the additionalinformation and instructions contained underTire inflation pressure, refer to page 152.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been reset while the in‐flation pressure was correct; otherwise, it maynot reliably signal a loss in pressure.Perform a system reset after adjusting the tireinflation pressure to a new value and afterchanging a tire or wheelAlways use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐sure that the system will operate properly.

Seite 76

CONTROLS Safety

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 79: 2015 countryman

Performing a resetPerform a system reset after adjusting the tireinflation pressure to a new value and afterchanging a tire or wheel.

1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol for the Tire Pressure Monitor and "AC‐TIVE" are displayed. The Tire Pressure Mon‐itor can be reset with "RESET".

5. Press and hold the button until "RESET‐TING" is displayed.

6. Drive away.After a short trip at over 20 mph/30 km/h,the set tire inflation pressures are adoptedas target values. The reset is completed au‐tomatically as you drive.The trip can be interrupted at any time.When driving resumes, the reset is contin‐ued automatically.

Low tire pressure messageThe warning lights come on in yellowand red. A Check Control message isdisplayed. In addition, a signal sounds.

▷ There is a flat tire or substantial loss of infla‐tion pressure on the indicated wheel.

▷ The system was not reset after a wheelchange and thus issues warnings based onthe inflation pressures initialized last.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withregular tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 160, are la‐beled on the tire sidewall with a circularsymbol containing the letters RSC.

Seite 77

Safety CONTROLS

77Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 80: 2015 countryman

Do not continue driving without run-flattires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued drivingmay result in serious accidents.◀

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSCDynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐essary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in allfour tires. The tire pressure gauge of theMobility System, refer to page 161, can beused for this purpose.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Tire Pressure Monitor may nothave been reset. Reset the system.If an identification is not possible, pleasecontact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 161.Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐tem, may damage the TPM wheel electron‐ics. In this case, have the electronicschecked at the next opportunity and havethem replaced if necessary.

Run-flat tiresYou can continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Do not continue driving without run-flattires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued drivingmay result in serious accidents.◀

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the

next opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Tire Pressure Monitor may nothave been reset. Reset the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on the cargo loadand the driving style and conditions.For a vehicle containing an average load, thepossible driving distance is ap‐prox. 50 miles/80 km.When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance, and altered self-steeringproperties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance dependson how the vehicle is used during the trip, theactual distance may be smaller or greater de‐pending on the driving speed, road conditions,external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tireDrive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.A loss of tire inflation pressure results in achange in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance and altered self-steering prop‐erties.◀

Seite 78

CONTROLS Safety

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 81: 2015 countryman

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reducespeed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tirecould come loose and cause an accident. Donot continue driving, and contact your servicecenter.◀

Message indicating that the inflationpressure needs to be checked

The yellow warning light lights up.A Check Control message is displayed.

▷ The system has detected that a wheel waschanged but a reset was not performed.

▷ The tire was not inflated according to speci‐fications.

▷ The tire pressure has dropped since the lastconfirmation.

In this case:▷ Check the tire inflation pressure and correct

it if necessary.▷ After changing a wheel, reset the system.

System limitsThe system will not function properly if a resetwas not performed, e.g., it may identify a tire asflat although the tire is filled to the correct infla‐tion pressure.The tire pressure depends on the temperatureof the tire. An increase in the tire temperature,e.g., while driving or due to sunlight, increasesthe tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure de‐creases when the tire temperature drops. Incase of severe temperature drops, this behaviormay lead to a warning on account of the de‐fined warning limits.

MalfunctionThe yellow warning light flashes yellowand then lights up continuously.A Check Control message is displayed.

A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannotbe detected.Display in the following situations:▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is

mounted, e.g., a compact wheel:Have the system checked by the servicecenter if necessary.

▷ Malfunction:Have the system checked by the servicecenter.

▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.Reset the system again.

The yellow warning light flashes andthen lights up continuously.A Check Control message is displayed.

A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannotbe detected.Display in the following situation:▷ Disturbance by other systems or devices

with the same radio frequency:After leaving the area of the disturbance,the system automatically becomes activeagain.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS138 Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemsEach tire, including the spare (if provided)should be checked monthly when cold and in‐flated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.).As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

Seite 79

Safety CONTROLS

79Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 82: 2015 countryman

should stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the lowtire pressure telltale. When the system detectsa malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐mately one minute and then remain continu‐ously illuminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle startups as long asthe malfunction exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐placement or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐placement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

Seite 80

CONTROLS Safety

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 83: 2015 countryman

Driving stability control systemsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Antilock Brake SystemABSABS prevents locking of the wheels duringbraking.Steerability is maintained even during full brak‐ing. This increases active driving safety.ABS is operational every time you start the en‐gine.

Electronic brake-force distribution EBVThe system controls the brake pressure in therear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

CBC Cornering Brake ControlWhen braking in curves or during a lanechange, driving stability and steering responseare improved further.

Brake assistantWhen the brakes are applied rapidly, this sys‐tem automatically produces the maximumbraking force boost. In this way, the systemhelps keep the braking distance as short as

possible. This system utilizes all of the benefitsprovided by ABS.Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedalfor the duration of full braking.

Dynamic Stability Con‐trol DSCThe conceptDSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheelswhen driving away and accelerating.DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subjectto physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicleon a steady course by reducing engine speedand by applying brakes to the individualwheels.DSC is operational every time you start the en‐gine.

Adjust your driving style to the situationAn appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver.The laws of physics cannot be repealed, evenwith DSC.Do not reduce the additional safety marginwith a risky driving style, as otherwise there is arisk of an accident.◀

Seite 81

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

81Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 84: 2015 countryman

Deactivating DSC

Press the switch until the DSC OFF indicatorlamp lights up in the speedometer and DSC OFFappears in the tachometer. DSC is deactivated.Intervening measures to stabilize the vehicleand give it forward momentum are no longerexecuted.

When driving with snow chains or to rock thevehicle free of snow, it may be useful to deacti‐vate DSC temporarily.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC againas soon as possible.

Activating DSCPress the switch again; the DSC indicator lampsin the display elements go out.

Indicator/warning lightsThe indicator lamp in the tachometerflashes: DSC is controlling the driveforces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC hasfailed.

The indicator lamp in the speedometerlights up and DSC OFF appears in thetachometer.

DSC and DTC deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Con‐trol DTCThe conceptThe DTC system is a version of the DSC in whichforward momentum is optimized.The system ensures maximum forward mo‐mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐ited.It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ate caution.You may find it useful to briefly activate DTCunder the following special circumstances:▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in

slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered roadsurfaces

▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting offin deep snow, sand, or on loose ground

▷ When driving with snow chains.

Seite 82

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 85: 2015 countryman

Activating DTC

Press the switch; the DSC OFF indicator lamplights up in the speedometer and TRACTIONappears in the tachometer. Dynamic StabilityControl DSC is deactivated, Dynamic TractionControl DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTCPress the switch again; the DSC OFF indicatorlamp in the speedometer and TRACTION in thetachometer go out.In the interest of better forward momentum,brake intervention is performed in the mannerof a differential lock when the drive wheels spinunevenly even when DSC/DTC is deactivated.

Indicator/warning lampsThe indicator lamp in the tachometerflashes: DTC is controlling the driveforces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC hasfailed.

The indicator lamp in the speedometerlights up and TRACTION appears in thetachometer.

DTC is activated.

Hill drive-off assistantThis system supports driving away on gradients.The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the footbrake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive awaywithout delay.

Driving off without delayAfter releasing the foot brake, start driv‐

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistantwill not hold the vehicle in place for more thanapprox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will beginrolling back.◀

ALL4 all-wheel systemALL4 is the all-wheel system of your MINI. Thecombined effects of ALL4 and DSC further opti‐mize the traction and dynamic driving charac‐teristics. The ALL4 all-wheel system variablydistributes the drive forces to the front and rearaxles depending on the driving situation andprevailing road conditions.

Sport buttonWhen this button is pressed, the vehicle re‐sponds in an even sportier manner.

Seite 83

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

83Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 86: 2015 countryman

▷ The engine responds more spontaneouslyto accelerator movements.

▷ The steering responds more directly.▷ Cooper S, John Cooper Works: the engine

sounds sportier when coasting.▷ For Steptronic transmissions: more rapid

gear changes in the Sport program.

Activating the system

Press the switch; the LED in the button lights upand SPORT is displayed briefly in the tachome‐ter.

Deactivating the system▷ Press the switch again.▷ Switch the engine off.

Seite 84

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 87: 2015 countryman

Driving comfortVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Cruise controlThe conceptThe system is functional at speeds beginning atapprox. 20 mph/30 km/h.The vehicle stores and maintains the speedspecified using the controls on the steeringwheel.

Do not use cruise controlDo not use the system if unfavorable con‐

ditions make it impossible to drive at a constantspeed, for instance:▷ On curvy roads.▷ In heavy traffic.▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface.Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicleand cause an accident.◀

Controls

At a glance

1 Maintaining, storing, and increasing thespeed

2 Activating/deactivating cruise control3 Maintaining, storing, and reducing the

speed4 Resuming cruise control

Switching onPress button 2.

The indicator lamp lights up in thespeedometer. Cruise control is ready tooperate and can be activated.

Switching offPress button 2.▷ When activated: press twice.▷ When interrupted: press once.The displays go out. The stored target speed iscleared.

InterruptingPress button 2.The system is interrupted automatically if▷ The brakes are applied.▷ The clutch pedal is depressed.

Seite 85

Driving comfort CONTROLS

85Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 88: 2015 countryman

▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.▷ DSC intervenes.

Maintaining, storing the current speedPress button 1 or button 3.The current speed is maintained and stored. Itis displayed briefly in the tachometer.On downhill gradients, it may prove impossibleto maintain the set speed if the engine brakingpower is insufficient. On uphill gradients, it mayprove impossible to maintain the set speed ifthe engine power output is insufficient.

Increasing speed▷ Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired

speed is reached.Each time the button is pressed, the speedincreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Press and hold button 1 until the desiredspeed is reached.The vehicle accelerates without pressure onthe accelerator pedal. After the button isreleased, the achieved speed is maintainedand stored.

Decreasing speedPress button 3 repeatedly or hold it until thedesired speed is reached.The functions are the same those when thespeed is increased, only that the speed is re‐duced.

Resuming a speed stored beforehandPress button 4.The last stored speed is resumed and main‐tained.The stored speed is cleared when the ignition isswitched off.

Display in the tachometer

The selected speed is displayed briefly.

If the display --- mph or --- km/h appearsbriefly, conditions may not be adequate to op‐erate the system.

For better controlThe indicator lamp lights up in thespeedometer. Cruise control is ready tooperate and can be activated.

MalfunctionThe warning lamp in the tachometerlights up.The system is malfunctioning or has

failed.

Park Distance ControlPDCThe conceptPDC provides support when parking in reverse.Signal tones indicate that the vehicle is ap‐proaching an object behind it. Measurementsare made by four ultrasound sensors in thebumpers.The range of these sensors is approx. 6 ft/2 m.An acoustic warning is first given:▷ By the two corner sensors at ap‐

prox. 24 in/60 cm.

Seite 86

CONTROLS Driving comfort

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 89: 2015 countryman

▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.5 ft/1.50 m.

Avoid driving quickly with PDCPDC is a parking aid that can display ob‐

jects when the vehicle approaches them slowly,as is the case during parking maneuvers. Avoiddriving toward an object quickly as the systemmay then be too late in issuing a warning fortechnical reasons.◀

Automatic operationThe system is activated after approx. one sec‐ond when reverse gear or selector lever posi‐tion R is engaged while the engine is running orthe ignition is switched on. Await this short pe‐riod before setting the vehicle into motion.

Signal tonesThe closer the vehicle is to the object, theshorter the intervals become. If the distance toa detected object is less than approx.12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.If the distance remains constant, for examplewhen driving parallel to a wall, the signal toneis stopped after approx. 3 seconds.

VolumeThe signal tone volume can be adjusted.Radio MINI Boost CD, refer to page 124.

System limitsCheck the traffic situation as wellPDC cannot serve as a substitute for the

driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐dent could result from road users or objectslocated outside of the PDC detection range.Loud noises from outside and inside the vehiclemay prevent you from hearing the PDC's signaltone.◀

MalfunctionThe warning light lights up. PDC is mal‐functioning or has failed. Have the sys‐tem checked.

To ensure full functionality of the sensors, keepthe sensors clean and free of ice. When usinghigh-pressure washers, do not spray the sen‐sors for long periods and maintain a distance ofat least 12 in/30 cm.

Seite 87

Driving comfort CONTROLS

87Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 90: 2015 countryman

ClimateVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Air conditioner

1 Air volume2 Cooling function3 Recirculated air mode4 Temperature

5 Rear window defroster6 Vent settings7 Windshield heating

NotesSufficient ventilationWhen remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐

tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu‐

lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in theinterior continuously worsens.◀

Seite 88

CONTROLS Climate

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 91: 2015 countryman

Air volumeVary the air volume. The higherthe rate, the more effective theheating or cooling will be.The air flow rate may be reducedor the blower may be switched

off entirely to save on battery power.

Switching the system on/offTurn the rotary switch for the air volume to 0.The blower and air conditioner are completelyswitched off and the air supply is cut off.Set any air volume to switch on the air condi‐tioning.

Cooling functionThe passenger compartment canonly be cooled with the enginerunning.The cooling function cools anddehumidifies the incoming air

before reheating it as required, according tothe temperature setting.The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.

Depending on the weather, the windshield mayfog up briefly when the engine is started.To cool the air faster and more intensivelywhen external temperatures are high, switchon the recirculated air mode.

Recirculated air modeIf the air outside the car has anunpleasant odor or contains pol‐lutants, shut off the supply to theinterior of the car temporarily.The system then recirculates the

air currently within the vehicle.

Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-air mode, press the AUTO button or switch offthe recirculated-air mode and increase the air

volume if necessary. Make sure that air canflow onto the windshield.Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐vated at low external temperatures.

TemperatureTurn upward, red, to raise thetemperature.Turn downward, blue, to lowerthe temperature.

Rear window defrosterThe rear window defrosterswitches off automatically after acertain period of time.The rear window defrosterpower may be lowered or even

switched off entirely to save on battery power.

Vent settingsDirect the flow of air to the win‐dows , to the upper bodyarea , or to the footwell .Intermediate positions are possi‐ble.

Windshield heatingThe windshield heating switchesoff automatically after sometime.The windshield heating may bereduced or even switched off en‐

tirely to save on battery power.

Defrosting and defogging windows1. Set the maximum air volume.2. Air distribution in position .

By switching on the cooling function, thewindows are defogged more rapidly.

3. Set the highest temperature, red.

Seite 89

Climate CONTROLS

89Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 92: 2015 countryman

4. Deactivate recirculated air mode.5. Switch on the windshield heating if neces‐

sary.6. Switch on the rear window defroster if nec‐

essary.

MicrofilterThe microfilter traps dust and pollen. The mi‐crofilter is changed by the service center duringroutine maintenance work.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterThe microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from theoutside air. The service center replaces thiscombined filter during routine maintenance.

Automatic climate control

1 Air volume, manual2 AUTO program3 Recirculated air mode4 Maximum cooling5 Manual air distribution6 Temperature

7 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐sation

8 Cooling function9 Rear window defroster10 Windshield heating

Seite 90

CONTROLS Climate

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 93: 2015 countryman

NotesSufficient ventilationWhen remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐

tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu‐lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in theinterior continuously worsens.◀

Comfortable interior climateThe AUTO program offers the optimum air dis‐tribution and air volume for virtually all condi‐tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select acomfortable interior temperature only.The following sections contain more detailedinformation on the available setting options.Most of these settings are stored for the remotecontrol in use, Personal Profile settings, refer topage 21.

Air volume, manualPress the – button to reduce theair volume. Press the + button toincrease the air volume.The automatic mode for the airvolume can be switched on

again using the AUTO button.

The air flow rate may be reduced or the blowermay be switched off entirely to save on batterypower. The display remains the same.

Switching the system on/offReduce the air volume by pressing the – buttonuntil the system is switched off. All displays goout.Press the AUTO button to switch the automaticclimate control back on.

AUTO programThe AUTO program automati‐cally adjusts the air distributionto the windshield and side win‐dows, toward the upper bodyarea, and into the footwell. The

air volume and your specifications for the tem‐perature are adjusted to outside influences dueto the seasons, e. g., solar radiation.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.The program is switched off if the air distribu‐tion is manually adjusted or the button ispressed again.

Recirculated air modeIf the air outside the car has anunpleasant odor or contains pol‐lutants, shut off the supply to theinterior of the car temporarily.The system then recirculates the

air currently within the vehicle.

Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-air mode, press the AUTO button or switch offthe recirculated-air mode and increase the airvolume if necessary. Make sure that air canflow onto the windshield.Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐vated at low external temperatures.

Maximum coolingAutomatic climate controlswitches to the lowest tempera‐ture, a high air volume, and re‐circulated air mode.For maximum cooling, open the

vents for the upper body area.

The air is cooled as quickly as possible:▷ At an external temperature above

32 ℉/0 ℃.▷ When the engine is running.

Seite 91

Climate CONTROLS

91Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 94: 2015 countryman

Manual air distributionThe flow of air is directed, as se‐lected, to the windows, to theupper body area, or to the foot‐well.The automatic mode for the air

distribution can be switched back on using theAUTO button.

TemperatureSet the desired temperature in‐dividually.The automatic climate controlachieves this temperature asquickly as possible regardless of

the season, using maximum cooling or heatingpower if necessary, and then maintains it.

When switching between different temperaturesettings in rapid succession, the automatic cli‐mate control does not have sufficient time toadjust the set temperature.

Rear window defrosterThe rear window defrosterswitches off automatically after acertain period of time.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, upperwires are used as an antenna and are not partof the rear window defroster.

Defrosting and defogging windowsQuickly removes ice and con‐densation from the windshieldand front side windows. For thispurpose, also switch on the cool‐ing function.

The windshield heating switches on automati‐cally.

Windshield heatingThe windshield heating switchesoff automatically after sometime.

Cooling functionThe cooling function cools anddehumidifies the incoming airbefore reheating it as required,according to the temperaturesetting. The passenger compart‐

ment can only be cooled with the engine run‐ning.

The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.Depending on the weather, the windshield mayfog up briefly when the engine is started. Recir‐culated air mode is switched on automatically ifnecessary.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally when the AUTO button is pressed.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterThe microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from theoutside air. The service center replaces thiscombined filter during routine maintenance.

Seite 92

CONTROLS Climate

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 95: 2015 countryman

Ventilation

1 Knob for continuous opening and closing2 Nozzle for direction of air flow

Opening/closingTurn the knob.

Direction of air flowPivot the entire nozzle.

Seite 93

Climate CONTROLS

93Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 96: 2015 countryman

Interior equipmentVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Universal garage dooropenerThe conceptThe universal garage door opener can be usedto operate up to 3 functions in remote-control‐led systems, such as garage door drives orlighting systems. The universal garage dooropener replaces up to 3 different hand-heldtransmitters. To operate it, the buttons on theinterior rearview mirror must be programmedfor the desired functions. The hand-held trans‐mitter for the system is needed for the pro‐gramming procedure.

During programmingDuring programming and before activat‐

ing a device using the Universal Garage DoorOpener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐mals, or objects in the range of movement ofthe remote-controlled device; otherwise, thereis a risk of injury or damage.Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

Before selling the vehicle, delete the storedfunctions for security reasons.

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the packag‐ing or in the operating instructions ofthe system being operated, the system

is generally compatible with the universal ga‐rage door opener.If you have any questions, please contact:▷ Your service center.▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.HomeLink is a registered trademark of theGentex Corporation.

Controls on the interior rearview mirror

1 LED2 Buttons3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐

gramming.

Programming

General information1. Switch on the ignition.2. Initial setup:

Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐rior rearview mirror begins to flash. Allprogrammed settings of the buttons on theinterior rearview mirror are deleted.

Seite 94

CONTROLS Interior equipment

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 97: 2015 countryman

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttonson the interior rearview mirror. The re‐quired distance depends on the particularhand-held transmitter.

4. Press the button of the desired function onthe hand-held transmitter and the buttonbeing programmed on the interior rearviewmirror simultaneously and hold. The LED onthe interior rearview mirror flashes slowly atfirst.

5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, releaseboth buttons. Rapid flashing indicates thatthe button on the interior rearview mirrorhas been programmed.If the LED does not flash faster after 60 sec‐onds, change the distance between the in‐terior rearview mirror and the hand-heldtransmitter and repeat the step. Multipletrials at different distances may be neces‐sary. Wait at least 15 seconds between tri‐als.

6. To program additional functions on otherbuttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be operated with the buttonson the interior rearview mirror.

Special characteristics of alternating-code radio systemsIf the system cannot be operated after re‐peated programming, check whether the sys‐tem to be operated uses an alternating-codesystem.Read the operating instructions of the systemor press and hold the programmed button onthe interior rearview mirror. If the LED on theinterior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at firstand then lights up continuously for 2 seconds,the system is equipped with an alternating-code system. This flashing LED pattern repeatsitself for approx. 20 seconds.

In systems with an alternating-code system, theuniversal garage door opener and the systemmust be additionally synchronized.Please obtain additional information on syn‐chronization in the operating instructions of thesystem being set up.The systems will be easier to synchronize withthe aid of a second person.Synchronization:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐mote-controlled system.

2. Program the corresponding button on theinterior rearview mirror as described.

3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐ton on the system being set up. You haveapprox. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Press and hold the button on the interiorrearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds andthen release it. Repeat this step up to threetimes if necessary to complete the synchro‐nization procedure. When synchronizationis completed, the programmed function isexecuted.

Reprogramming individual buttons1. Switch on the ignition.2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis‐

tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm fromthe memory buttons.The required distance depends on the par‐ticular hand-held transmitter.

3. Press the memory button of the universalgarage door opener.

4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.20 seconds, press the transmit button onthe hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashesrapidly.If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap‐prox. 60 seconds, change the distance andrepeat the step.

Seite 95

Interior equipment CONTROLS

95Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 98: 2015 countryman

Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af‐ter approx. 60 seconds, change the dis‐tance and repeat the step. If programmingwas aborted by the hand-held transmitter,hold down the memory button and pressand release the button on the hand-heldtransmitter several times for 2 seconds.

ControlsPrior to operationBefore operating a unit with the Universal

Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are nopeople, animals, or objects in the range ofmovement of the system; otherwise, there is arisk of injury or damage.Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

The system, such as the garage door, can beoperated using the button on the interior rear‐view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐tion switched on. When you are within the re‐ception range of the system, press and hold thebutton until the function is initiated. The LED onthe interior rearview mirror lights up continu‐ously while the radio signal is being transmit‐ted.

Deleting stored functionsPress the right and left buttons on the interiorrearview mirror simultaneously for approx.20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. Allstored functions are deleted. The functions can‐not be deleted individually.

Sun visorGlare protection

Folding downFold the sun visor down.

Folding upFold the sun visor up.

Glare protection from the side

Folding down1. Fold the sun visor down.2. Detach from the holder and pivot sideways

to the side window.

Folding upTo close the sun visor, proceed in reverse order.

Vanity mirrorA vanity mirror is located behind a cover oneach sun visor.To open, fold the cover up.Depending on the vehicle equipment, mirrorlighting comes on when the cover is opened.

Digital compass

1 Adjustment button on the back of the mir‐ror

2 Display

The display shows the main or secondary com‐pass direction in which the vehicle is traveling.

Operating conceptVarious functions can be called up by pressingthe adjustment button with a pointed objectsuch as a pen. The following adjustment op‐tions are displayed one after the other, de‐

Seite 96

CONTROLS Interior equipment

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 99: 2015 countryman

pending on how long the adjustment button ispressed:▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand

steering.

▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.

Setting compass zonesSet the compass zone corresponding to the ve‐hicle's geographic location so that the compasscan function correctly; refer to the world mapwith compass zones.

Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds.The number of the compass zone set is shownin the display.To change the zone setting, briefly press theadjustment button repeatedly until the displayshows the number of the compass zone corre‐sponding to the current location.The compass is operational again after approx.10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compassThe digital compass must be calibrated in thefollowing situations:▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown.

▷ The cardinal direction displayed does notchange even if the direction of travelchanges.

▷ Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐

jects or overhead power lines in the vicinityof the vehicle and that there is enoughspace to drive in a circle.

2. Set the currently valid compass zone.3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐

onds to call up C. Then drive at least one fullcircle at a maximum speed of4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali‐brated, the C is replaced by the compass di‐rections.

Seite 97

Interior equipment CONTROLS

97Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 100: 2015 countryman

Right-hand/left-hand steeringThe digital compass is set for right-hand or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the languagePress the adjustment button for 12‑13 seconds.Briefly press the adjustment button again toswitch between English "E" and German "O".The setting is automatically saved after approx.10 seconds.

Cupholders and ashtray/lighter

CupholdersTwo cupholders are located in the center con‐sole in the front.MINI Countryman: two additional cupholdersare located at the end of the center console inthe rear. Additional cupholders can be installedon the center rail.

MINI Paceman: additional cupholders are lo‐cated in the console between the rear seats.

Depending on the equipment, additional cu‐pholders can be installed on the center rail.

Shatter-proof containers and no hotdrinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and donot transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is theincreased danger of injury in an accident.◀

Unsuitable containersDo not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐

ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐age.◀

AshtrayThe ashtray is located in one of the cupholdersin the center console at the front.

EmptyingTake out the entire ashtray, arrow.When installing, ensure that the ashtray is in‐serted in the cupholder with the adapter.

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignitionswitched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

Seite 98

CONTROLS Interior equipment

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 101: 2015 countryman

The lighter can be removed as soon as it popsback out.

Danger of burnsOnly hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.Switch off the ignition and take the remotecontrol with you when leaving the vehicle sothat children cannot use the lighter and burnthemselves.◀

Connecting electrical de‐vicesThe lighter socket can be used as a socket forelectrical equipment while the engine is run‐ning or when the ignition is switched on. Thetotal load of all sockets must not exceed140 watts at 12 volt.Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting toinsert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Do not connect the charger to the socketDo not connect the battery charger to the

socket installed in the vehicle at the factory asthis could damage the battery.◀

Replace the cover after useReplace the lighter or socket cover after

use; otherwise, objects that fall into the lightersocket or power socket could cause a short cir‐cuit.◀

Socket in the center consoleRemove the cover or lighter, refer to page 98,from the socket.

Socket in the rear

MINI Countryman

Take out the cover.

MINI Paceman

Take out the cover.

Socket in the cargo area

MINI Countryman

Take out the cover.

Seite 99

Interior equipment CONTROLS

99Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 102: 2015 countryman

MINI Paceman

Take out the cover.

Cargo areaCargo cover

Do not place objects on the coversDo not place objects on the cover; if you

do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu‐pants during braking or evasive maneuvers ordamage the cover.◀

Move the cover into positionWhen closing, ensure that the cargo cover

is resting on the rubber buffers of the securingstraps; otherwise, damage may occur whenclosing the tailgate.◀

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover israised.To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re‐moved.

1. Detach the securing straps from the tail‐gate.

2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull itback and out of the bracket, arrow 2.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

MINI Countryman: rear seat backrestsDanger of pinchingBefore folding down the rear seat back‐

rests, ensure that path of movement of thebackrests is clear. Especially when the middlesection is folded down, ensure that no one islocated in or reaches into the path of move‐ment of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, in‐juries or damage may result.◀

Observe the instructions concerning thesafety belt

Observe the instructions concerning the safetybelt, refer to page 37. Otherwise, personal pro‐tection may be compromised.◀

The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of40-20-40.When the outer rear seat backrests are foldeddown, it is not permissible for a person to travelon the center seat.Remove the third head restraint, refer topage 40, if necessary.

Seite 100

CONTROLS Interior equipment

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 103: 2015 countryman

Open the center safety belt and insert it in thebelt holder on the headliner, refer to page 38.Enlarge the cargo area by adjusting the rearseat backrests to a more upright position.The backrests can be adjusted to 10 differentpositions between the comfort and transportpositions and they can be folded down.In the comfort position, the backrests are tiltedback to the greatest possible angle and in thetransport position they are nearly vertical.Before beginning with the mounting of a childrestraint fixing system, note the instructions,refer to page 43.

1. Hold the top of the backrest, for examplethe head restraint, and pull on the loop, ar‐row.

2. Engage the backrest in the desired positionor fold it down.

Folding the backrests back upLocking the backrestWhen folding back, ensure that the locks

engage properly; otherwise, cargo could becatapulted forward into the passenger com‐partment during braking maneuvers andswerving, endangering the occupants.◀

No child restraint fixing systemsDo not mount child restraint fixing sys‐

tems in the rear when the rear seat backrestsare adjusted to a more vertical position; other‐wise, the protection provided by these systemsmay be reduced.◀

When the backrests are folded back up, theyengage in the transport position.To set the desired backrest inclination or com‐fort position, hold the backrest, pull the loopforward, and adjust the backrest.

MINI Paceman: rear seat backrestsDanger of pinchingBefore folding down the rear seat back‐

rests, ensure that path of movement of thebackrests is clear; otherwise, injuries or damagemay result.◀

1. Fold the belt buckles down.

2. Pull on the respective loop, arrow.The backrest is unlocked.

3. Fold the backrest forward.

Folding the backrests back upHold the top of the backrest, for example thehead restraint, and fold it back.

Locking the backrestWhen folding back, ensure that the locks

engage properly; otherwise, cargo could becatapulted forward into the passenger com‐

Seite 101

Interior equipment CONTROLS

101Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 104: 2015 countryman

partment during braking maneuvers andswerving, endangering the occupants.◀

Flat loading floorMaximum loadDo not exceed the maximum load of

330 lbs, 150 kg, on the loading floor; otherwise,damage may result.◀

Access to storage areaA storage area for items like the partition net isfound under the loading floor.

1. Reach into the recess, arrow 1, on the rearedge of the loading floor.

2. Lift the loading floor at the rear, arrow 1,and fold it forward, arrow 2.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Before closing the tailgate, lower the loadingfloor back onto the cargo area floor.

RemovingThe loading floor can be removed if necessary.

1. Fold up the loading floor.2. Pull it back slightly and out of the holders.3. Then remove it upward.The folded loading floor can be stored in thecargo area.

MINI Countryman: partition netFirmly attach the partition netMake sure that the partition net is firmly

attached; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Before installing1. Remove the pouch with the partition net

from the storage compartment under theloading floor in the cargo area.

2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un‐roll it, and unfold it.After use, fold and roll up the partition netin the same manner and place it in thepouch so that it can be stowed back underthe cargo floor panel. Ensure that hooksand tensioning buckles do not rest on therod elements.

3. Unfold the partition net to the point wherethe rod elements engage.

Installation behind the front seats

1. Take out the cargo cover if necessary.2. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to

Enlarging the cargo area.

Seite 102

CONTROLS Interior equipment

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 105: 2015 countryman

3. Insert the retaining pins of the partition netall the way into the front holders in theheadliner, arrow 1, and push forward.

4. Attach the hooks, arrow 2, at the bottom ofthe retaining straps on both sides to theeyelets on the vehicle floor.

5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐sioning buckles.

RemovingTo remove and stow the partition net, proceedin reverse order.

To fold up, press the release button, arrow.

MINI Countryman: multi-function hook

Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags andtotes, for example, are located on the left andright sides of the cargo cover support, arrow.

Do not hang heavy items from the hooksOnly hang light bags or suitable objects

from the holders. Otherwise, there is a dangerof objects flying about during braking and eva‐sive maneuvers.

Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if ithas been appropriately secured.◀

Seite 103

Interior equipment CONTROLS

103Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 106: 2015 countryman

Storage compartmentsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

NotesNo loose objects in the passenger com‐partment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐partment without securing them; otherwise,they may present a danger to occupants for in‐stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐vers.◀

No non-slip mats on the dashboardDo not use non-slip materials, such as

non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could bedamaged by the substances in the materials.◀

Storage compartmentsInterior▷ Glove compartment, refer to page 104.▷ Center armrest, refer to page 105.▷ Center rail, refer to page 105.▷ Compartments in the center console.▷ Compartments in the doors.▷ Pockets on the back of the front seat back‐

rests.

▷ Cupholders, refer to page 98.▷ Clothes hooks, refer to page 105.

Cargo area▷ Lashing eyes, refer to page 116.▷ Storage compartment under the flat load‐

ing floor, refer to page 102.▷ Multi-function hook on the cargo cover

support, refer to page 103.

Glove compartmentOpening

Pull the handle to open the lid.The light in the glove compartment switcheson.

ClosingFold up the cover.

Close the glove compartment again im‐mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately afteruse while driving; otherwise, injury may occurduring accidents.◀

Seite 104

CONTROLS Storage compartments

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 107: 2015 countryman

Center armrestThe center armrest between the front seatscontains a storage compartment or a cover forthe snap-in adapter, refer to page 143, de‐pending on the equipment.Do not position tall accessory parts directly onthe center rail of the center armrest; otherwise,they may be damaged when the center arm‐rest is opened or closed.

Center armrest front

OpeningPress the button, arrow, and pull up the lid.

Center railVarious accessory parts can be mounted on thecenter rail and moved to different positions.Do not use accessory parts in the area of theparking brake; otherwise, they may becomedamaged when the parking brake lever is acti‐vated.

Base plateVarious accessory parts such as cupholders canbe mounted on the base plate.

Inserting the base plateThe lever 3 can be engaged in three positions.

0 Setting1 Adjusting the position on the rail2 Inserting the base plate

To insert, move the lever to position 2.

Adjusting the position and fixing1. Push lever 3 into position 1.2. Adjust the position of the base plate.3. Push lever 3 downward into position 0.

Do not apply excessive pressure to thelever.

The base plate is fixed.Fix the base plateFix the base plate before driving away;

otherwise, injuries may result during an acci‐dent.◀

Clothes hooksClothes hooks are located on the grab handlesin the rear.

Do not obstruct viewWhen suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐er's vision.◀

No heavy objectsDo not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a dangerto passengers during braking and evasive ma‐neuvers.◀

Seite 105

Storage compartments CONTROLS

105Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 108: 2015 countryman

Connection for an exter‐nal audio device

This can be used to connect an external audiodevice, such as a CD or MP3 player.

Radio MINI Boost CD, refer to page 130.

Seite 106

CONTROLS Storage compartments

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 109: 2015 countryman

Seite 107

Storage compartments CONTROLS

107Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 110: 2015 countryman

DRIVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 111: 2015 countryman

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 112: 2015 countryman

Things to remember when drivingVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Breaking-in periodGeneral informationMoving parts need to be broken in to adjust toeach other.The following instructions will help achieve along vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differentialAlways obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDrive at various engine and vehicle speeds, butdo not exceed:▷ For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.Avoid full-throttle operation and use of thetransmission's kickdown mode for the initialmiles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 kmThe engine and vehicle speed can gradually beincreased.

TiresDue to technical factors associated with theirmanufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐tion potential until after an initial breaking-inperiod.Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimizedcontact and wear patterns between brake padsand discs. Drive cautiously during this break-inperiod.

ClutchThe clutch requires an initial break-in period ofapprox. 300 miles/500 km to function at an op‐timal level.During this break-in period, engage the clutchgently.

Following part replacementThe same breaking in procedures should be ob‐served if any of the components mentionedabove have to be renewed in the course of thevehicle's operating life.

General driving notesGround clearance

Ensure adequate ground clearanceEnsure adequate ground clearance, e.g.,

when driving into underground garages, whendriving over curbs, or when driving in winter;otherwise, damage may occur to the vehicle.◀

Seite 110

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 113: 2015 countryman

Closing the tailgateDrive with the tailgate closedOnly drive with the tailgate closed; other‐

wise, passengers and other road users may beendangered or the vehicle may be damaged ifan accident occurs or during braking or swerv‐ing. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter thepassenger compartment.◀

If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven withthe tailgate open:▷ Drive moderately.▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.▷ Switch off recirculated air mode and greatly

increase the blower speed.

Hot exhaust systemHot exhaust systemHigh temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system.Do not remove the heat shields installed andnever apply undercoating to them. Make surethat flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hotexhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐sition mode, or when parked. Such contactcould lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐ous personal injury as well as property damage.Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,there is the danger of getting burned.◀

Mobile communication devices in thevehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve‐hicle

It is not recommended to use mobile phones,such as mobile phones without a direct con‐nection to an external aerial in the vehicle'spassenger compartment. Otherwise, the vehi‐cle electronics and mobile communication de‐vices can interfere with each other. In addition,there is no assurance that the radiation gener‐

ated during transmission will be dischargedfrom the vehicle interior.◀

HydroplaningOn wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water canform between the tires and road surface.This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ing. It is characterized by a partial or completeloss of contact between the tires and the roadsurface, ultimately undermining your ability tosteer and brake the vehicle.

HydroplaningWhen driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tiretread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,refer to page 158.

Driving through waterDrive though calm water only if it is not deeperthan 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, nofaster than walking speed, up to6 mph/10 km/h.

Using the parking brake on inclinesUsing the parking brakeOn inclines, do not hold the vehicle sta‐

tionary with a slipping clutch for extended pe‐riod; use the parking brake instead. Otherwise,the clutch will be subject to increased wear.◀

Support from the hill drive-off assistant, refer topage 83.

Braking safelyThe vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standardfeature.Applying the brakes fully is the most effectiveway of braking in situations when this is neces‐sary.The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.You can still avoid any obstacles with a mini‐mum of steering effort.

Seite 111

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

111Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 114: 2015 countryman

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds fromthe hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in itsactive mode.

Do not let your foot rest on the brakepedal

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brakepedal. Even light but consistent pedal pressurecan lead to high temperatures, brake wear andpossibly even brake failure.◀

Objects in the area around the pedalsNo objects in the area around the pedalsKeep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;otherwise, the function of the pedals could beimpeded while drivingDo not place additional floor mats over existingmats or other objects.Only use floor mats that have been approvedfor the vehicle and can be properly fixed inplace.Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastenedagain when they are returned after being re‐moved, such as for cleaning.◀

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet or there is heavy rain,briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedalevery few miles.Ensure that this action does not endanger otherroad users.The heat generated in this process helps drythe brake discs and pads.In this way braking efficiency will be availablewhen you need it.

HillsDrive long or steep downhill gradients in thegear in which the least braking is required. Oth‐erwise, the brake system may overheat, result‐ing in a reduction in the brake system effi‐ciency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect byshifting down, going all the way to first gear, ifnecessary.Downshifting in manual mode of the Steptronictransmission, refer to page 56.

Avoid load on the brakesAvoid placing excessive load on the brake

system. Light but consistent brake pressure canlead to high temperatures, brake wear andpossibly even brake failure.◀

Do not drive in neutralNever drive with the transmission in neu‐

tral, with the engine switched off or with theclutch depressed; otherwise, you will have nei‐ther the braking action of the engine or nor itspower assistance when braking or steering.◀

Brake disc corrosionCorrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐tion on the brake pads are furthered by:▷ Low mileage.▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all.▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressurethat must be exerted by the pads during brakeapplications to clean the discs is not reached.Should corrosion form on the brake discs, thebrakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐fect that generally cannot be corrected.

When the vehicle is parkedWhen using the automatic climate control, con‐densation water develops that exits under‐neath the vehicle.Therefore, traces of condensed water under thevehicle are normal.After the engine is switched off, the coolantpump may continue running for some time inthe MINI Cooper S. This causes noises in the en‐gine compartment.

Seite 112

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 115: 2015 countryman

Driving on poor roadsYour MINI with ALL4 all-wheel drive feels com‐fortable on all streets and roads. It combines anall-wheel drive system with the advantages of anormal passenger car.

Do not drive on unpaved terrainDo not drive on unpaved terrain, as oth‐

erwise the vehicle may be damaged.◀

For your own safety and the safety of passen‐gers and the vehicle, adhere to the followingpoints:▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before

driving; never take risks.▷ Adjust speeds according to road conditions.

The steeper and rougher the road surfaceis, the lower the speed should be.

▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhillgrades: the engine oil and coolant shouldbe filled nearly to the MAX mark.

▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta‐cles and drive around these where possible.

▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contactbetween the vehicle body and the ground.The maximum ground clearance is 6 in‐ches/15 cm and may vary with the loadedcargo.

▷ When driving through water, do not exceedthe maximum water height of 12 in‐ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.

▷ After driving through water, press on thebrake pedal several times at low speeds todry the brakes.

▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti‐vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC briefly,refer to page 82.

▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to enablethe driving stability control systems to dis‐tribute the drive force to the individualwheels.

After driving on poor roadsAdhere to the following points to ensure vehi‐cle safety:▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt

and mud from the vehicle body.▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels

and tires and check for damage.

Seite 113

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

113Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 116: 2015 countryman

LoadingVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationOverloading the vehicleTo avoid exceeding the approved carry‐

ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating andincreases the rate at which damage developsinside the tires. This could result in a suddenloss of tire inflation pressure.◀

No fluids in the cargo areaMake sure that fluids do not leak into the

cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐aged.◀

Determining the loadlimit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐hicle's placard:▷ The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg orYYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐hicle and unstable driving situationsmay result.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms or YYYpounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca‐pacity.For example, if the YYY amount equals1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐sengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacityis 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed the

Seite 114

DRIVING TIPS Loading

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 117: 2015 countryman

available cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, loadfrom your trailer will be transfered to yourvehicle. Consult the manual for transportinga trailer to determine how this may reducethe available cargo and luggage load ca‐pacity of your vehicle.

Load4-seater:

5-seater:

The maximum load is the sum of the weight ofthe occupants and the cargo.The greater the weight of the occupants, theless cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not

occupied, secure each of the outer safetybelts in the opposite buckle.

▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and aslow as possible, ideally directly behind thebackrests.

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.▷ Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge

of the backrests.▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests

to stow cargo.▷ Use the partition net, refer to page 102, to

protect passengers. Make sure that objectscannot penetrate the partition net.

▷ Place protective material around any sharp-edged or pointed objects that could bumpagainst the rear window while the vehicle isin motion.

MINI Countryman

MINI Paceman

Seite 115

Loading DRIVING TIPS

115Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 118: 2015 countryman

Securing cargoLashing eyes in the cargo area

MINI Countryman

MINI Paceman

Securing cargo▷ Secure smaller and lighter pieces with tight‐

ening belts or straps.▷ Secure larger and heavier pieces with cargo

straps.Adhere to the information included withthe cargo straps.

▷ Eight mounting eyes are available for fas‐tening the cargo straps.Two of them are located on the side wall ofthe cargo area, arrows 1, and two are lo‐cated on the rear wall of the cargo area, ar‐rows 2.

Securing cargoStow and secure the cargo as described

above; otherwise it may present a danger tothe occupants, for instance during braking andavoidance maneuvers.Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in thepassenger compartment without securingthem; otherwise, they may present a danger tooccupants, for instance during braking andavoidance maneuvers.Never exceed either the approved gross vehicleweight or either of the approved axle loads, asexcessive loads can pose a safety hazard, andmay also place you in violation of traffic safetylaws.Do not secure cargo using the upper LATCHmounting points, refer to page 45; otherwise,these may become damaged.◀

Roof-mounted luggagerackNotesA special rack system is available as an optionalaccessory.

AttachmentFollow the installation instructions for the roof-mounted luggage rack.Ensure that adequate clearance is available forthe movement of the glass sunroof.

LoadingBecause roof racks raise the vehicle's center ofgravity when loaded, they have a major effecton vehicle handling and steering response.Therefore, note the following when loading anddriving:▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicleweight.

Seite 116

DRIVING TIPS Loading

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 119: 2015 countryman

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.▷ The roof load should not be too large in

area.▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐

tom.▷ Fasten the roof-mounted luggage securely,

for instance using lashing straps.▷ Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the tailgate.▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration

and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐tly.

Rear luggage rackNotesA special rear rack is available as an optionalaccessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.Follow the installation instructions for the rearrack.

Anchorage pointsMINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

The anchorage points are under the covers inthe bumper.Push out the covers on the corresponding cut‐outs.

LoadingWhen loading the vehicle, ensure that the ap‐proved gross vehicle weight and the axle loadsare not exceeded. Adhere to the weight specifi‐cations in the technical data.

Seite 117

Loading DRIVING TIPS

117Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 120: 2015 countryman

Saving fuelVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationYour vehicle contains advanced technology forthe reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐sions.Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ferent factors. The implementation of certainmeasures, driving style and regular mainte‐nance can have an influence on fuel consump‐tion and on the environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargoAdditional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following useRemove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof orrear luggage racks after use.Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close both windowsOpen windows causes higher air resistance andthus increases fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressureregularlyCheck and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐tion pressure, refer to page 152, at least twicea month and before starting on a long trip.Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐sistance and thus raises fuel consumption andtire wear.

Drive away without delayDo not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary. Start drivingright away, but at moderate engine speeds.This is the fastest way for the cold engine toreach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when drivingAvoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. Toachieve this, maintain a suitable distance to thevehicle driving ahead of you.Driving smoothly and looking ahead reducesfuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speedsUse 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. Whenaccelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐gine speeds.When you reach the desired speed, shift intothe highest applicable gear and drive with theengine speed as low as possible and at a con‐stant speed.As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowersfuel consumption and reduces wear.

Use coasting conditionsWhen approaching a red light, take your footoff the accelerator and coast to a halt in thehighest applicable gear.

Seite 118

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 121: 2015 countryman

On a downhill slope, take your foot off the ac‐celerator and coast in a suitable gear.The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longerstopsSwitch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in trafficcongestion.Fuel savings are already achieved after the en‐gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.

Switch off any functions that are notcurrently neededFunctions such as seat heating and the rearwindow defroster require a lot of energy andconsume additional fuel, especially in city andstop-and-go traffic.Therefore, switch off these functions if they arenot actually needed.

Have maintenance carried outHave vehicles maintained regularly to achieveoptimal vehicle economy and operating life.Have the maintenance carried out by the serv‐ice center.Please also note the MINI maintenance system,refer to page 169.

Seite 119

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

119Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 122: 2015 countryman

ROCK ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 123: 2015 countryman

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 124: 2015 countryman

Radio MINI Boost CDVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationAt a glance

1 Change the audio sources.2 On/off, volume.

▷ Press: switch on/off.▷ Turn: adjust the volume.

3 Show the tone settings.4 Function buttons for selecting the menu

items shown directly above them on thedisplay.

5 Change the station or track.

6 Display.7 Select the functions.

▷ Turn: highlight the menu item on thedisplay or set the value.

▷ Press: select the highlighted menu itemor store the settings.

8 Place/end calls.9 Opens the main menu.10 Manually select the frequency.

Seite 122

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 125: 2015 countryman

11 CD slot. 12 Eject the CD.

Representation in the Owner's Manual"…" Identifies radio display texts used to selectindividual functions.

Menu navigationRadio and telephone functions can be openedusing buttons on the radio and menus.

Opening menu itemsTo display the menu items:

▷ Press the button once for the audiosources menu.

▷ Press the button for the mainmenu.

Selecting menu itemsThere are several ways to select a menu itemon the display.

Using the right knob

▷ To mark a menu item: turn the right knob,arrow 2.

▷ To select a menu item: press the right knob,arrow 1.

Using the function buttonsPress the left or right side of the functionbutton under the menu item.

If only one menu item is displayed above thefunction button, press the middle of the button.

Via the MODE buttonPress the button repeatedly until thedesired audio menu is selected.

Symbols on the display

Symbol Meaning

Function is selected.

Function is activated.

The function is deactivated.

Leave the menu, one menu back.

Display additional menu items.

Scroll display. The list contains morethan two entries.

Change to the higher level directory.

Setting valuesFor setting numerical values or values on ascale:

1. Mark the desired menu item and press theright knob.

2. Turn the right knob to set the value.3. Press the right knob to store the value.

Switching on/offPress the left knob. The radio selects the audiosource set last: radio, satellite radio, CD, exter‐nal audio device, or USB audio interface.

Listening to the radio with the ignitionswitched offWhen the radio ready state or the ignition isswitched off, the radio functions are available

Seite 123

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

123Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 126: 2015 countryman

for approx. 20 minutes. To listen to the radio,switch it back on.To spare the battery, ensure that the radio isswitched off when you leave the vehicle.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the left knob. The setting is stored for theremote control currently in use.When a call is placed using the hands-free sys‐tem, the audio sources are muted.

Speed-dependent volume and volumesof PDC signal tone and gong▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal tone com‐

pared to the audio sources.▷ "GONG": volume of the gong compared to

the audio sources.▷ "S-VOL": speed-dependent volume control.Set the audio sources to a high volume to beable to adjust the volume of the signal tonesmore easily.

1. Press the button.2. Select the symbol if necessary.3. Select the desired volume setting.4. Set the desired volume and press the right

knob.

Volume of external audio devicesAn external audio device such as an MP3 playercan be connected via the AUX-IN port in thecenter console and the audio tracks can beplayed over the car's loudspeaker system.The volume of the external audio device can beadjusted to the car radio.

1. Press the button.2. "AUX"3. "Vol-AUX"4. Set the desired volume and press the right

knob.

Tone settings▷ "BASS": depth adjustment.▷ "TREBLE": treble adjustment.▷ "FADER": front/rear volume distribution.▷ "BAL": left/right volume distribution.The sound settings are set globally for all audiosources.

Setting the treble, bass, and volumedistribution

1. Press the button.2. Highlight the desired tone setting and press

the right knob.3. Create the desired setting and press the

right knob.

Resetting the tone settingsThe tone settings are reset to medium values.

1. Press the button.2. "RESET"

Time

Setting the time, date, and time format1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "CONFIG"4. "TIME"5. Select the desired category.6. Create the settings and press the right

knob.

Seite 124

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 127: 2015 countryman

Setting the units of measure of thecomputer and the language1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "CONFIG"4. ▷ "DIST": change the unit of measure for

the range.▷ "LANG": select the language of the dis‐

play texts.▷ "CONSMP": change the unit of measure

for the average fuel consumption.▷ "TEMP": change the unit of measure for

the external temperature.5. Highlight the desired menu item and press

the button.6. Create the desired setting.

ComputerThe following vehicle information can be call upvia the computer:▷ Average fuel consumption▷ Average speed▷ Range

Displaying information1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "COMP"

Average fuel consumptionThe average fuel consumption is calculated forthe time during which the engine is running.To start calculation of the average fuel con‐sumption:

1. "CONSMP"2. "RESET"

The previous display is set to zero and the sys‐tem begins recalculating the average fuel con‐sumption.

Average speedThe average speed is calculated for the timeduring which the engine is running.To start calculation of the average speed:

1. "SPEED"2. "RESET"

Estimated range"RANGE"The display shows the estimated distance thatcan be still be driven on the remaining fuel,taking into consideration the driving style overthe last 18 miles/30 km.

RadioListening to the radioThe radio is designed for reception in the FMand AM wavebands.

1. Switch on the radio, refer to page 123.

2. Press this button if necessary.3. "TUNER"4. "FM" or"AM"

Press the corresponding button repeatedlyuntil the desired waveband is displayed.▷ FM: FM1, FM2, FMA▷ AM: AM, AMA

Selecting a stationThe setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Next station

Press the button.

Seite 125

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

125Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 128: 2015 countryman

The next station with reception is selected.

Selecting the station manually byfrequency

1. Press the button.2. ▷ Press the respective function button to

set the desired frequency.▷ Turn the right knob until the desired

frequency is set.

Automatically updating the stationswith the best reception, AUTOSTOREIn the FMA and AMA memory levels, stationsare automatically stored according to their re‐ception strength. If the AUTOSTORE function isnot used, six stations can be manually stored ineach of the FMA and AMA memory levels.

1. "FM" or"AM"Press the corresponding button until thefollowing is displayed:"AUTOSTORE"

It may take several seconds for the stations tobe stored and for one of these stations to beplayed back.

Briefly playing and selecting a station"SC"All stations with reception are played briefly.To interrupt the function and select a station:"SC"

Storing and retrieving a station

Memory locationsIt is possible to store up to 30 stations.▷ FM1, FM2, AM: six stations each.▷ FMA, AMA: the six stations with the best re‐

ception (automatically) or any six stations(manually).

Storing a station1. "FM" or"AM"

Select the desired function repeatedly untilthe desired waveband is displayed.

2. Select the station.3. "1" ... "6"

Press and hold the function button underthe desired memory location until the sta‐tion is audible again after a brief interrup‐tion.

Retrieving a stored station1. "FM" or"AM"

Select the desired function repeatedly untilthe desired waveband is displayed.

2. "1" ... "6"Press and hold the desired function buttonor turn the right knob until the desired sta‐tion is displayed.

Radio Data System, RDSRDS broadcasts additional information, such asthe station name or text messages, in the FMwaveband. When playing a station with multi‐ple frequencies, the system automaticallyswitches to the frequency with the best recep‐tion, if needed.Some stations broadcast the type of programreceived, or PTY, via RDS. This information isdisplayed briefly when the station is selected,for instance NEWS.PTY can also be used to display catastrophealerts, such as "ALARM".The alert is issued on the loudspeakers.

Switching the RDS on/off1. "SET"2. "RDS"When the RDS is switched off, the PTY functionis switched off as well.

Seite 126

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 129: 2015 countryman

Switching the program type displayon/off1. "SET"2. "PTY"

HD Radio™ receptionMany stations broadcast both analog and digi‐tal signals. These stations can be received digi‐tally and therefore with better sound quality. Adigital radio network must be available to beable to receive digital stations.License conditionsHD Radio Technology manufactured under li‐cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD,HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade‐marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radioreception

1. Press the button.2. "TUNER"3. "SET"4. "HD"

Displays▷ "HD": a station is received digitally.▷ "(HD)": a station broadcasts digital signals

but digital radio reception is switched off.In areas in which the selected station is notcontinuously received in digital mode, playbackswitches between analog and digital reception.In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Selecting the programs of a digitalstationSome stations broadcast multiple programs. Toselect one of these programs:

1. Press the button repeatedlyuntil the desired digital station is displayed.If a station broadcasts multiple programs,

the following display appears, for example:"HD1"

2. "LIST"3. "HD1" ... "HD8" Select the desired pro‐

gram. Up to eight programs can be se‐lected per station.

Displaying additional informationFor digital stations, additional information canbe displayed on the current track, such as thename of the artist."INFO"

Operational displays▷ "acquiring": the system is looking for digital

stations.▷ "No Signal": no digital stations are being re‐

ceived.

Satellite radioOver 100 different channels with high fidelitycan be received. The channels are offered infixed packages and must be activated.You may experience signal drops and mutingevents related to this new technology.

Activating or deactivated channels

1. Press the button.2. "SAT"3. "CAT"4. Select the desired category.

The channels are displayed. This symbol identifies the current chan‐

nel.

Activating1. Turn the right knob to select a channel that

is not yet activated.2. Press the right knob to confirm a channel.

Seite 127

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

127Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 130: 2015 countryman

A phone number and the electronic serialnumber, ESN, are displayed. The electronicserial number is required for activation.

3. To have the channels activated, call thephone number.

Deactivating

1. Press the button.2. "SAT"3. "SAT"

Hold the button down.A phone number and the electronic serialnumber, ESN, are displayed. The electronicserial number is required for deactivation.

4. To have the channels deactivated, call thephone number.

Selecting and storing a channel

1. Press the button.2. "SAT"3. "CAT"4. Select the desired category.5. Select the desired channel.To display all channels:"ALL"To store a channel:

1. Select the symbol.2. "SAT"

Press the button repeatedly until the de‐sired memory level, SAT 1 or SAT 2, isreached.

3. "1" ... "6"Press and hold the function button underthe desired memory location until thechannel is audible again after a brief inter‐ruption.

Changing to the current channel"CURR"

Additional informationThe name of the channel and additional infor‐mation on the current track are displayed, suchas the name of the artist.

1. Select the desired channel.2. "INFO"

Changing the channel using the buttons

Press the button for the corre‐sponding direction. The next enabled channelis opened.

Search

1. Press and hold the button forthe corresponding direction. The activatedchannels appear on the display one afterthe other.

2. Release the button to select the displayedchannel.

NotesWhen there is a signal blockage or the trans‐mission is suspended momentarily for morethan 4 seconds, a message will appear on thedisplay.Service may be interrupted or unavailable forspecific reasons such as environmental or topo‐graphic conditions and others that SatelliteRadio cannot directly control. Signal may not beavailable under tunnels, in parking garages,next to tall buildings, nearby trees with densefoliage, nearby mountains or other possiblestrong sources of radio interference. Serviceshould resume normally after the source of sig‐nal unavailability has been cleared.

CD playerLoading the CD playerInsert the CD into the CD drive with the printedside up.

Seite 128

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 131: 2015 countryman

Playback begins automatically.Reading can take a few minutes with com‐pressed audio files.

Starting the CD playerA CD is contained in the CD player.

1. Switch on the car radio if necessary.

2. Press the button.3. "CD"

Skipping to another track

Press the button repeatedly untilthe desired track is played.With the right knob:Turn the right knob until the desired track isplayed back.

Fast forward/reverse

Hold the button down.Tracks can be heard but are distorted.

Briefly playing and selecting a track"SC"All tracks are played briefly one after the other.To interrupt the function and select a track:"SC"

Random playback"RND"To end random playback:"RND"

Compressed audio filesCD players can play back CDs with compressedaudio data: MP3 and WMA.

Selecting a track1. "LIST"2. Select the desired directory using the right

knob.▷ : press the right knob to open a di‐

rectory.▷ : press the right knob to close a di‐

rectory.3. Select other directories if you wish.4. Highlight the desired track and press the

right knob.You can scroll through the directories duringplayback.To change to the current track:"CURR"

Displaying information on the trackAny information stored on the currently se‐lected track can be displayed.

1. "LIST"2. "TRACK"

Ejecting a CD from the CD player

Press the button.The CD emerges slightly from the CD drive.

Operational displays▷ "Insert CD"

The CD slot is empty.▷ "Error CD"

The CD cannot be read or is defective.▷ "Temp. CD"

Operating temperature is too high.

Seite 129

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

129Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 132: 2015 countryman

Notes

CD playerDo not remove the coverThe CD players are officially designated

Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if thecover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye dam‐age can result.◀

CDsUsing CDs▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs with la‐

bels applied, as these can becomedetached during playback due toheat buildup and can cause irrepara‐ble damage to the device.

▷ Only use round CDs with a standard diame‐ter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDswith an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise,the CDs or the adapter may jam and no lon‐ger eject.◀

General malfunctions▷ The CD players have been optimized for

performance in vehicles. In some instancesthey may be more sensitive to faulty CDsthan stationary devices would be.

▷ If a CD cannot be played, first check if it hasbeen inserted correctly.

HumidityHigh levels of humidity can lead to condensa‐tion on the CD or the laser's scan lens, and tem‐porarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with particular CDsIf malfunctions occur only with particular CDs,this can be due to one of the following causes:

Self-recorded CDs▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-

recorded CDs are inconsistent data creation

or recording processes, or poor quality orold age of the blank CD.

▷ Only label CDs on the upper side with a penintended for this purpose.

Damage▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and

moisture.▷ Store CDs in a sleeve.▷ Do not subject CDs to temperatures over

50 ℃/122 ℉, high humidity, or direct sun‐light.

CDs with copy protectionCDs are often provided with a copy protectionfeature by the manufacturer. This can meanthat some CDs cannot be played or can only beplayed to a limited extent.

MACROVISIONThis product contains copyrighted technologythat is based on multiple registered US patentsand the intellectual property of the MacrovisionCorporation and other manufacturers. The useof this copy protection must be approved byMacrovision. Media protected by this product -unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision -may only be used for private purposes. Copyingof this technology is prohibited.

External devicesAUX-IN port

At a glance▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3

player. The sound is output on the vehicleloudspeakers.

▷ Recommendation: use medium tone andvolume settings on the audio device. Thetone depends on the quality of the audiofiles.

Seite 130

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 133: 2015 countryman

Connecting

The AUX-IN port is in the centerconsole.Connect the headphone connec‐tor or line-out connector of thedevice to the AUX-IN port.

Ensure that the connector is inserted all theway into the AUX-IN port.

Playback1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device.

2. Press the button.3. "AUX"

VolumeThe volume of the sound output is dependenton the audio device. If this volume differsmarkedly from the volume of the other audiosources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting the volume

1. Press the button.2. "AUX"3. "Vol-AUX"4. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device.

USB audio interface

At a glanceIt is possible to connect external audio devices.The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeak‐ers.

Connectors for external devices▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones thatare supported by the USB audio interface.

▷ External audio devices, e.g. MP3 player:connection via AUX-IN socket.

▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer topage 143, when equipped with the musicinterface for smartphones: Apple iPhone ormobile phones.Playback is only possible if no audio deviceis connected to the analog AUX-IN port.

Due to the large number of different audio de‐vices available on the market, it cannot be en‐sured that every audio device/mobile phone isoperable on the vehicle. Additional informationcan be obtained at www.mini.com/connectivityor from the service center.

Audio filesStandard audio files can be played back:▷ MP3.▷ WMA.▷ WAV (PCM).▷ AAC, M4A.▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.

File systemStandard file systems for USB devices are sup‐ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.

Seite 131

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

131Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 134: 2015 countryman

Connecting

The USB audio interface is in thecenter console.

Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USBaudio interfaceTo connect the iPod, use the special cableadapter for the Apple iPod. Additional informa‐tion can be obtained from the service center oron the Internet: www.mini.com/connectivityConnect the Apple iPod/iPhone with the AUX-IN port and USB interface.The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐ported by the USB audio interface.

Connection of a USB device via the USBaudio interfaceConnect using a flexible adapter cable to pro‐tect the USB audio interface and the USB deviceagainst physical damage.Connect the USB device to the USB interface.

Audio deviceConnect the headphone connector or line-outconnector of the device to the AUX-IN port ofthe USB audio interface.Ensure that the connector is inserted all theway into the AUX-IN port.

After connecting for the first timeInformation on all music tracks, e.g. artist ortype of music, as well as playback lists aretransmitted into the vehicle. This may takesome time, depending on the USB device andthe number of tracks.During transmission, the tracks can be called upvia the file directory.

Number of tracksInformation from up to four USB devices or forapprox. 20,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if morethan 20,000 tracks are stored, information onexisting tracks may be deleted.

Copy protectionMusic tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐agement (DRM) cannot be played.

Playback

1. Press the button.2. "IPOD" or "USB" or "AUX"

Changing the music track

Skipping to another trackIt is possible to skip to another track within theselected directory.

Press the button repeatedly untilthe desired track is played.With the right knob:Turn the right knob until the desired track isplayed back.

Fast forward/reverse

Hold the button down.Tracks can be heard but are distorted.

Seite 132

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 135: 2015 countryman

Random playback"RND"To end random playback: "RND"

Selecting a trackDepending on the connected device, the trackcan be selected via the following category:▷ "LIST": playback lists.▷ "GEN": musical genre.▷ "ART": artist.▷ "ALB": album.1. Select the desired category.2. If necessary, select the desired directory us‐

ing the right knob.▷ : press the right knob to open a di‐

rectory.▷ : press the right knob to close a di‐

rectory.3. Select other directories if you wish.4. Highlight the desired track and press the

right knob.You can scroll through the directories duringplayback.To change to the current track:"CURR"

Displaying information on the trackAny information stored on the currently se‐lected track can be displayed."TRACK"

Adjusting the volumeThe volume of the sound output is dependenton the audio device. If this volume differsmarkedly from the volume of the other audiosources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

1. "LEV"2. Turn the right knob until the desired vol‐

ume is set and press the knob.

NotesDo not expose the audio device to extreme en‐vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐peratures; refer to the audio device operatinginstructions.Depending on the configuration of the audiofiles, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, thefiles may not play back correctly in each case.

Information on connection▷ It is only possible to connect one iPod/

iPhone to the vehicle at a time.▷ Playback from the iPod/iPhone is only pos‐

sible via the USB audio interface if a snap-inadapter is not used.

▷ The connected audio device is suppliedwith a max. power of 500 mA if supportedby the device. Therefore, do not addition‐ally connect the device to a socket in thevehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐promised.

▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐nector into the USB interface.

▷ Do not connect devices such as fans orlamps to the USB audio interface.

▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐

charge external devices.

Seite 133

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

133Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 136: 2015 countryman

CONNECT ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 137: 2015 countryman

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 138: 2015 countryman

TelephoneVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

At a glanceThe conceptMobile phones can be connected with the vehi‐cle via Bluetooth.After a suitable mobile phone is paired with thevehicle once, you can operate the mobilephone via the radio, the buttons on the steer‐ing wheel, and via voice activation.Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐tooth® SIG, Inc.Certain functions may need to be enabled bythe mobile phone provider or service provider.

Using the mobile phone while drivingMake entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phonein your hand while you are driving; use thehands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐hicle occupants and other road users.◀

Snap-in adapterThe snap-in adapter is used to:▷ Hold the mobile phone.▷ Recharge the battery.

▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outsideantenna of the vehicle.This provides for better network receptionand consistent sound quality.

Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.

Approved mobile phonesDetails on which mobile phones with a Blue‐tooth interface are supported by the mobilephone preparation package can be obtained atwww.mini.com/connectivity.

NotesAt high temperatures, the charging function ofthe mobile phone may be limited and functionsmay not be executed.

Controls

1 Display.2 Function buttons for selecting the menu

items shown directly above them on thedisplay.

3 Redial, accept a call, start dialing, terminatea call and change to the Telephone menu.

4 ▷ Turn: highlight the menu item on thedisplay or set the value.

Seite 136

COMMUNICATION Telephone

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 139: 2015 countryman

▷ Press: select the highlighted menu itemor store the setting.

5 Opens the main menu.6 On/off, volume control.

Menu navigationSelecting menu itemsThere are two ways to select a menu item onthe display.

Using the right knob

▷ To mark a menu item: turn the right knob,arrow 2.

▷ To select a menu item: press the right knob,arrow 1.

Using the function buttonsPress the left or right side of the functionbutton under the menu item.

If only one menu item is displayed above thefunction button, press the middle of the button.

Representation in the Owner's Manual"…" Identifies radio display texts used to selectindividual functions.

Symbols on the display

Symbol Meaning

Function is selected.

Leave the menu, one menu back.

Display additional menu items.

Scroll display. The list contains morethan two entries.

Reception of the wireless network:the display depends on the signalstrength.

Using the hands-free system.

Roaming is active.

Pairing/unpairing themobile phoneRequirements▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to

page 136.▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone.▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be

made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐nection without confirmation or visibility,refer to the mobile phone operating in‐structions.

▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐mum of 16 digits was defined as the Blue‐tooth passkey. It is only required once forpairing.

▷ The ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating BluetoothBluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Complywith all safety guidelines and regulations.

Seite 137

Telephone COMMUNICATION

137Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 140: 2015 countryman

To activate the connection:

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "BT-ON"To deactivate the connection again:

1. "BT"2. "BT-OFF"3. "YES"

Pairing and connectingPairing the mobile phoneTo avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐cle's occupants and to other road users, onlypair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐tionary.◀

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "BT"5. "PAIR"

Turn the right knob to display the Bluetoothname of your vehicle.

6. To perform additional steps on the mobilephone, refer to the mobile phone operatinginstructions: for instance, search for or con‐nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appearson the mobile phone display.

7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle onthe mobile phone display.You are prompted by the radio or mobilephone to enter the same Bluetooth pass‐key.

8. Enter the passkey on the mobile phone andconfirm it.

9. "ADD"10. Enter the same passkey on the radio using

the function buttons and confirm it.To delete the last digit: "DELETE"

11. "OK"Press twice if necessary.

If pairing was successful, the mobile phone ap‐pears on the radio display.Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐hicle at once.If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐fer to page 139.

Repeating the pairing procedure/helpIf pairing failed:

1. "REPEAT"2. Repeat steps 6 to 10.To display the Customer Relations phone num‐ber: "CALLS"Turn the right knob to display the Customer Re‐lations phone number and information neededfor pairing.

Following the initial pairing▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of timewhen the engine is running or the ignitionis switched on.

▷ The phone book entries of the telephonestored on the SIM card or mobile phone aretransmitted to the vehicle after detection,depending on the mobile phone.

▷ Specific settings may be necessary in somemobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐cure connection; refer to the mobile phoneoperating instructions.

Seite 138

COMMUNICATION Telephone

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 141: 2015 countryman

Connecting a particular mobile phone1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "BT"5. Turn the right knob until the mobile phone

to be connected is displayed.6. "PRIO"

Press the button repeatedly until the de‐sired position is reached.

Unpairing the mobile phone1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "BT"5. Turn the right knob until the mobile phone

to be unpaired is displayed.6. "DELETE"7. "YES"

What to do if...Information on suitable mobile phones, refer topage 136.The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐nected.▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth onthe vehicle and on the mobile phone.

▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobilephone and the vehicle match? Enter thesame passkey on the mobile phone and onthe radio.

▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enterthe passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.

▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connectedto the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐nections with other devices if necessary.

▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode ordoes it have only a limited remaining bat‐tery life? Charge the mobile phone in thesnap-in adapter or via the charging cable.

▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connectedmobile phone from the vehicle and pairand connect only one mobile phone.

The mobile phone no longer reacts?▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or

low? Do not expose the mobile phone toextreme environmental conditions.

No phone book entries or only some phonebook entries are displayed, or they are incom‐plete.▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete.▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐

tries of the mobile phone or the SIM cardare transmitted.

▷ It may not be possible to display phonebook entries with special characters.

▷ The number of phone book entries to bestored is too high.

▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,e. g., due to stored information such asnotes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐tact.

The phone connection quality is poor.▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the

mobile phone can be adjusted, dependingon the mobile phone.

▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-inadapter or place it in the area of the centerconsole.

▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone andloudspeakers.

Seite 139

Telephone COMMUNICATION

139Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 142: 2015 countryman

If all points in this list have been checked andthe required function is still not available, con‐tact Customer Relations or the service center.

Controls▷ Accept/reject a call.▷ Dial a phone number.▷ Dial a phone number from the phone book.▷ Dial a stored phone number, such as from

the list of accepted calls.▷ End the call.When the ignition and the radio ready state areswitched off, such as after the remote control isremoved, an existing call can be continued forup to 25 minutes on the hands-free system.

Adjusting the volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐trol currently in use.

The ringer volume of incoming calls and the callvolume can be adjusted independently.When a call is placed using the hands-free sys‐tem, the audio sources are muted.

Switching the microphone to muteWhen a call is active, the microphone can bemuted."MUTE"

A microphone that has been switched to muteis automatically reactivated when a new con‐nection is established.

Incoming call

Receiving callsIf the number of the caller is stored in thephone book and is transmitted by the network,the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐wise, only the phone number is displayed.

Accepting a callBriefly press the button on the steeringwheel or radio.

or"YES"

Rejecting a call"NO"

Ending a callBriefly press the button on the steeringwheel or radio.

or"END"

Entering a phone number

Dialing a number1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "#"5. Enter the desired phone number on the

buttons 0–9.

Seite 140

COMMUNICATION Telephone

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 143: 2015 countryman

To delete the last digit: "DEL"

6. Briefly press the button on thesteering wheel or radio.orPress the right knob to dial the phone num‐ber.

Phone bookDialed phone numbers, incoming calls and en‐tries in the phone book are stored on lists if themobile phone is connected to the vehicle viaBluetooth.Five lists are available:▷ "A-Z"

Entries of the phone book of the SIM cardor of the mobile phone, which consist of aname and phone number, are sorted in al‐phabetical order.

▷ "TOP8"The Top 8 list contains the eight phonenumbers that were dialed most frequently.

▷ "LAST8"The last eight phone numbers that were di‐aled are stored. The phone number dialedlast is at the top of the list.

▷ "CALLS"The phone numbers of the last eight ac‐cepted calls are stored. For this to be possi‐ble, it must be possible to transmit thephone number of the caller.

▷ "MISSED"The phone numbers of the last eight callsthat were not accepted are stored. For thisto be possible, it must be possible to trans‐mit the phone number of the caller.

Dialing a phone number from the phonebookThe list A-Z is available for phone book entries.If entries with different names but the samephone number are transferred to the vehicle

from the mobile phone, only one entry is dis‐played.The display of the phone book entries on theradio may differ from the display on the mobilephone, such as the order of the first and lastnames.

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "A-Z"5. The arrows indicate that additional

letters can be displayed.Turn the right knob to display additionalletters if necessary.

6. Turn the right knob to select the first letterof the entry.

7. Select the entry with the function button.The phone number is dialed.

To display all entries:

1. Turn the right knob to select the first letterof the entry and press the knob.

2. Turn the right knob to select the desiredentry and press the knob.or

Press the button on the steeringwheel or radio to dial the number.

The phone number is dialed.

Editing and dialing a phone numberfrom the phone bookYou can edit the phone number of an entry be‐fore making a call. This change is not stored inthe phone book.

1. Selecting an entry.2. "EDIT"3. To delete a digit: "DEL"

Seite 141

Telephone COMMUNICATION

141Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 144: 2015 countryman

4. Enter additional digits on the buttons 0–9.5. Press the right knob to dial the phone num‐

ber.

Dialing a phone number from the phonebook using the buttons on the steeringwheel

1. Press and hold the button to dis‐play the Telephone menu.

2. Press the arrow buttons on the steeringwheel to leaf through the phone book.

3. Press the button to dial the phonenumber.

Dialing a phone number stored in a listTo select an entry and establish a connection:

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. Select a list, for instance "TOP8"5. Turn the right knob to select an entry and

press the knob to dial the phone number.

Deleting an individual entry1. Select an entry from the list.2. "DEL"

DTMF suffix dialingDTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐cess to network services or for controlling devi‐ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐swering machine. The DTMF code is needed forthis purpose.This function is only available if a connectionexists and if the hands-free system is beingused.

1. "KEYPAD"2. Enter the DTMF code on the buttons 0–9.

3. If necessary, press and hold the functionbutton on the right or left to enter specialcharacters.

Displaying the call durationDuring a call:"DURAT"

Hands-free system

General informationCalls that are being made on the hands-freesystem can be continued on the mobile phoneand vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands-free systemCalls that were begun outside of the Bluetoothrange of the vehicle can be continued on thehands-free system with the ignition switchedon.Depending on the mobile phone, the systemautomatically switches to the hands-free sys‐tem.If the system does not switch over automati‐cally, follow the instructions on the mobilephone display; refer also to the mobile phoneoperating instructions.

From the hands-free system to themobile phoneCalls that are made on the hands-free systemcan in some cases be continued on the mobilephone; this depends on the mobile phone.Follow the instructions on the mobile phonedisplay; refer also to the mobile phone operat‐ing instructions.

MINI phone numbersWhen the ignition is switched on, various serv‐ice phone numbers can be displayed.

Seite 142

COMMUNICATION Telephone

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 145: 2015 countryman

▷ "Road Assist": Roadside Assistance, if helpis required in the event of a breakdown.

▷ "Serv. Appt.": MINI service center, if a serv‐ice appointment needs to be arranged.

▷ "Cust Relat": Customer Relations, for infor‐mation on all aspects of your vehicle.

Displaying the phone numbers1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "MINI"4. Turn the right knob until the desired phone

number is displayed.

Snap-in adapterGeneral informationMore information on compatible snap-inadapters that support the functions of the mo‐bile phone is available at the service center.

NotesAt high temperatures, the charging function ofthe mobile phone may be limited and functionsmay not be executed.When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,note the operating instructions of the mobilephone.

Installation positionIn the center armrest.

Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter1. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the

cover, arrow 2.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐gages.

To remove:To remove the snap-in adapter, press the but‐ton.

Inserting the mobile phone1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove

the protective cap from the antenna con‐nector and from the USB connection of themobile phone.

2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobilephone up toward the electrical contacts, ar‐

Seite 143

Telephone COMMUNICATION

143Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 146: 2015 countryman

row 1, and press it down until it engages,arrow 2.

The battery is charged beginning with the radioready state of the vehicle.

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the mo‐bile phone, arrow 2.

Seite 144

COMMUNICATION Telephone

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 147: 2015 countryman

Seite 145

Telephone COMMUNICATION

145Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 148: 2015 countryman

MOVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 149: 2015 countryman

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 150: 2015 countryman

RefuelingVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationRefuel promptlyAt the latest, refuel at a range below

30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine functionis not ensured and damage may occur.◀

NotesSwitch off the engine before refuelingAlways switch off the engine before refu‐

eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to thetank and a message will be displayed.◀

Observe when handling fuel▷ Take all precautionary measures and

observe all applicable regulationswhen handling fuel.

▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers inyour vehicle. They can develop a leak andcause an explosion or cause a fire in theevent of an accident.◀

Fuel capOpening1. Open fuel filler flap.2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached

to the fuel filler flap.

Closing1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click.2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strapDo not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closedproperly and fuel vapors can escape.◀

A message is displayed if the cap is loose ormissing.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flapIn the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flapcan be released manually:MINI Countryman:

Seite 148

MOBILITY Refueling

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 151: 2015 countryman

MINI Paceman:

1. Open the cargo area trim, arrow.2. Pull the green knob with the gas pump

symbol.This opens the fuel filler flap.

Observe the followingwhen refuelingWhen refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuelpump nozzle during refueling causes:▷ Premature pump shutoff.▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐

ery system.The fuel tank is full after refueling is resumedtwice after the filler nozzle switches off for thefirst time.

Do not overfill the fuel tankDo not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,

escaping fuel may harm the environment ordamage the vehicle.◀

Handling fuelsFollow the safety instructions provided at

gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger ofpersonal injury and property damage.◀

Fuel tank capacityApprox. 12.3 US gal/47 liters, including a re‐serve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.

Seite 149

Refueling MOBILITY

149Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 152: 2015 countryman

FuelFuel recommendationVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

GasolineFor the best fuel economy, the gasoline shouldbe sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuelpump as containing metals.

Only refuel with lead-free gasoline with‐out metal additives

Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasolinewith metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron;otherwise, the catalytic converter and othercomponents will be permanently damaged.◀

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.The ethanol should fulfill the following qualitystandards:US: ASTM 4806–xxCAN: CGSB-3.511–xxxx: always adhere to the currently applicablestandard.

Do not refuel with ethanol E85Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an

ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, asthis would damage the engine and fuel supplysystem.◀

The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, youcan refuel with different recommended fuelgrades.

Recommended fuel gradeThe manufacturer of your MINI recommends:▷ AKI 91.▷ John Cooper Works AKI 93.

Minimum fuel gradeThe manufacturer of your MINI recommendsAKI 89.

Minimum fuel gradeDo not fill up with fuel below the speci‐

fied minimum quality; otherwise, the enginemay not run properly.◀

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat‐ing, the engine may produce knocking soundswhen starting at high outside temperatures.This has no effect on the engine life.

Minimum fuel gradeThe use of poor-quality fuels may result in

harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐ally, problems relating to drivability, startingand stalling, especially under certain environ‐mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐perature and high altitude, may occur.If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ommend switching to a high quality gasolinebrand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐chase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.Failure to comply with these recommendationsmay result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐nance.◀

Seite 150

MOBILITY Fuel

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 153: 2015 countryman

Seite 151

Fuel MOBILITY

151Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 154: 2015 countryman

Wheels and tiresVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Tire inflation pressureSafety informationIt is not merely the tires' service life, but alsodriving comfort and, to a great extent, drivingsafety that depend on the condition of the tiresand the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐sure.

Checking the pressureTires naturally lose pressure uniformly across allfour tires.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularlyRegularly check the tire inflation pressure

and correct it as needed: at least twice a monthand before a long trip. If you fail to observe thisprecaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐correct tire pressures, a condition that may notonly compromise your vehicle's driving stabil‐ity, but also lead to tire damage and the risk ofan accident.Do not drive with depressurized or flat tires, ex‐cept for run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriouslyimpair your vehicle's handling and braking re‐sponse. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can leadto a loss of control over the vehicle.◀

Tires warm up during driving and the tire infla‐tion pressure increases as the temperaturerises. The tire inflation pressure specificationsapply to cold tires or tires at ambient tempera‐ture.Only check the tire inflation pressure when thetires are cold. This means after a maximum of1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehiclehas been parked for at least 2 hours. When thetires are warm, the tire inflation pressure ishigher.After correcting the tire inflation pressure, resetthe Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 77or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer topage 74.

Pressure specificationsThe tables below provide all the correct infla‐tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at am‐bient temperature.The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizesapproved and tire brands recommended by themanufacturer of the MINI; a list of these isavailable from the service center.For correct identification of the right tire infla‐tion pressures, observe the following:▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle▷ Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to100 mph or 160 km/hFor normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,adjust pressures to the respective tire inflationpressures listed on the following pages in thecolumn for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.These tire inflation pressures can also be foundon the driver's side door pillar when the driver'sdoor is open.

Seite 152

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 155: 2015 countryman

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Do not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed

The permissible maximum speed for these tireinflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h. Donot exceed this speed or else there is a risk oftire damage and accidents.◀

Tire inflation pressures for drivingabove 100 mph or 160 km/h

Adjust the tire inflation pressuresTo drive at maximum speeds in excess of

100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐spective tire inflation pressures listed on thefollowing pages in the column for travelingspeeds including those exceeding 100 mph or160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and acci‐dents could occur.◀

Observe all national and local maximum speedlimits; otherwise, violations of the laws couldoccur.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC205/55 R 17 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 207.

Seite 153

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

153Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 156: 2015 countryman

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper S/Countryman Cooper S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC205/55 R 17 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 207.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman John Cooper Works

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC

2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38

225/40 R 19 89 V RSC 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 207.

Seite 154

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 157: 2015 countryman

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC205/55 R 17 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 208.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper S / Paceman Cooper S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC205/55 R 17 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 208.

Seite 155

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

155Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 158: 2015 countryman

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman John Cooper Works

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 208.

Tire identification marksKnowledge of the labeling on the side of thetire makes it easier to identify and choose theright tires.

Tire sizeExample: 225/45 R 17 91 V225: nominal width in mm45: aspect ratio in %R: radial tire code17: rim diameter in inches91: load rating, not for ZR tires

Speed letterQ = up to 100 mph/160 km/hT = up to 118 mph/190 km/hH = up to 131 mph/210 km/hV = up to 150 mph/240 km/hW = up to 167 mph/270 km/hY = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberTires with DOT codes meet the guidelines ofthe U.S. Department of Transportation.DOT code:DOT xxxx xxx 2214xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brandxxx: tire size and tire design2214: tire age

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwearTraction AA A B CTemperature A B C

Seite 156

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 159: 2015 countryman

Conform to Federal Safety RequirementsAll passenger car tires must conform to

Federal Safety Requirements in addition tothese grades.◀

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may depart significantlyfrom the norm due to variations in driving hab‐its, service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire's ability to stopon wet pavement as measured under control‐led conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction performance.The traction grade assigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead braking traction tests, anddoes not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest, B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi‐

cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐quired by law.

Temperature grade for this tireThe temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.◀

RSC – Run-flat tiresThe symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circlewith the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer topage 160.

M+SWinter and all-season tires.These have better winter properties thansummer tires.

XLDesignation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire treadSummer tiresThe tread depth should not be less than0.12 in/3 mm, although European legislation,for example, requires a minimum tread depthof only 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths lessthan 0.12 in/3 mm, there is a great danger ofhydroplaning even in low water depths and atraised speeds.

Winter tiresThe suitability of winter tires for winter drivingis reduced noticeably when their tread depthbecomes less than 0.16 in/4 mm.

Seite 157

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

157Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 160: 2015 countryman

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators in the tread base are distrib‐uted around the circumference of the tire andare marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, TreadWear Indicator. When the tire tread has beenworn down to the wear indicators, a tread hasreached a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

Tire damageGeneral informationInspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

NotesDriving over rough or damaged road surfaces,as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles cancause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐pension parts. This is more likely to occur withlow-profile tires, which provide less cushioningbetween the wheel and the road. Be careful toavoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐fects:▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐

dency to pull to the left or right.Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,road damage and similar situations.

In case of tire damageIf there are indications of tire damage, re‐

duce your speed immediately and have thewheels and tires checked right away; other‐wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.Drive carefully to the next service center or tireshop.If necessary, have the vehicle towed.Otherwise, tire damage can present a life-threatening hazard to vehicle occupants andother road users.◀

Repair of tire damageFor safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not havedamaged tires repaired; they should be re‐placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐sult.◀

Tire ageRecommendationFor several reasons, among other things be‐cause of beginning brittleness, the manufac‐turer of your MINI recommends mounting newtires at the latest after six years, regardless ofthe actual wear.

Manufacture dateThe date of manufacture of the tires is specifiedin the tire label:DOT … 0315: the tire was manufactured in the3rd week of 2015.

Seite 158

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 161: 2015 countryman

Changing wheels andtiresMounting

Information on mounting tiresHave mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center or tire specialist.If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.◀

Wheel and tire combinationInformation on the right wheel and tire combi‐nation and rim version for your vehicle can beobtained from the service center.Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impairthe function of a variety of systems such as ABSor DSC.To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐figuration from a single manufacturer.Following tire damage, have the original wheeland tire combination remounted on the vehicleas soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐

mends that you use only wheels and tires thathave been approved for your particular vehiclemodel.For example, despite having the same officialsize ratings, variations can lead to body contactand with it, the risk of severe accidents.The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐ate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐mine if they are suited for use, and thereforecannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐cle if they are mounted.◀

Wheels with electronics for TPM TirePressure MonitorWhen mounting new tires or changing fromsummer to winter tires or vice versa, only usewheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, theTire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detecta flat tire, refer to page 76. Your service centerwill be glad to advise you.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐hicle recommends certain tire brands. Theseare indicated by the clearly visible marking onthe tire sidewall.With proper use, these tires meet the higheststandards for safety and handling.

Retreaded tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tiresPossibly substantial variations in the de‐

sign and age of the tire casing structures canlimit service life and have a negative impact onroad safety.◀

Winter tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle recommendswinter tires for winter roads or at temperaturesbelow +45 ℉/+7 ℃.Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐vide better winter traction than summer tires,they do not provide the same level of perform‐ance as winter tires.

Seite 159

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

159Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 162: 2015 countryman

Maximum speed of winter tiresIf the maximum speed of the vehicle is higherthan the permissible speed for the winter tires,then display a corresponding sign in the field ofvision. You can obtain this sign from the tirespecialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tiresDo not exceed the maximum speed for

the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐cidents can occur.◀

Run-flat tiresWhen mounting new tires or changing fromsummer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat tires for your own safety. Also, a compactwheel is not available in case of a flat tire. Yourservice center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axlesDifferent wear patterns occur on the front andrear axles, depending on the individual condi‐tions of use.To ensure even wear on the tires, the wheelscan be rotated between the axles. Your servicecenter will be glad to advise you.After changing the tires, check the tire inflationpressure and correct it if necessary.

StorageStore wheels and tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible.Always protect tires against all contact with oil,grease and fuels.Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tiresLabel

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circlewith the letters RSC on the sidewall.Run-flat tires are tires that support themselvesfor a limited period of time, and they may alsocome with special rims. The sidewall reinforce‐ment ensures that the tire can continue to beused to a limited extent if it has lost pressureand even if it has become completely depres‐surized.For continued driving in the event of a flat tire,refer to page 75.

Correcting a flat tireSafety measures in case of a breakdown▷ Park the vehicle as far as possible

from passing traffic and on solidground. Switch on the hazard warn‐ing system.

▷ Let the steering wheel lock engage with thewheels in the straight-ahead position, setthe parking brake, and engage first gear orreverse, or engage selector lever position P.

▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out‐side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

Seite 160

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 163: 2015 countryman

▷ If a warning triangle or portable hazardwarning lamp is required, set it up on theroadside at an appropriate distance fromthe rear of the vehicle. Comply with allsafety guidelines and regulations.◀

The procedure to correct a flat tire depends onthe equipment in the vehicle:▷ Run-flat tires, refer to page 160.▷ MINI Mobility System, refer to page 161.

MINI Mobility SystemNotes▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐

lity System found on the compressor andsealant bottle.

▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐tive if tire damage is greater than approx.1/8 in/4 mm in size.

▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tirecannot be made drivable.

▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodiesthat have penetrated the tire.

▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealantbottle and apply it to the steering wheel.

Sealant and compressor

1 Sealant bottle and speed limit sticker2 Filling hose

Note the use-by date on the sealant bottle.

3 Holder for the sealant bottle4 Compressor5 Connector and cable for the lighter socket/

socket in passenger compartment  99.6 Connection hose for connecting the com‐

pressor and sealant bottle or the compres‐sor and wheel

7 On/off switch8 Pressure gauge for displaying the tire infla‐

tion pressure9 Release button for reducing the tire infla‐

tion pressure

The connector, cable, and connecting hose arestowed in the compressor housing.

Using the Mobility SystemTo repair a flat tire with the Mobility System,proceed as follows:▷ Filling the tire with sealant▷ Distributing the sealant▷ Correcting the tire inflation pressure

Filling the tire with sealantAdhere to the specified sequenceAdhere to the specified sequence of the

steps; otherwise, sealant may escape underhigh pressure.◀

1. Shake the sealant bottle.2. Pull the connection hose 6 fully out of the

compressor housing and screw it onto thesealant bottle connection. Ensure that theconnection hose is not kinked.

Seite 161

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

161Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 164: 2015 countryman

3. Insert the sealant bottle into the compres‐sor housing in a vertical position.

4. Unscrew the dust cap off of the valve of thedefective wheel and screw the filling hose 2of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off.6. Insert connector 5 into the lighter socket/

socket in the passenger compartment, referto page 99.

7. When the engine is running:Switch on the compressor and let it run forapprox. 3 to 8 minutes to fill sealant intothe tire and achieve a tire inflation pressureof approx. 1.8 bar/26 psi.While sealant is being filled, the inflationpressure may intermittently rise to approx.5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the com‐pressor in this phase.

8. Switch off the compressor.Do not allow the compressor to run toolong

Do not allow the compressor to run longer than10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheatand may be damaged.◀

If an air pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is notreached:

1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheeland drive forward and back approx.33 ft/10 m to evenly distribute the sealantin the tire.

2. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.

If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is stillnot reached, the tire is too heavily damaged.Contact the nearest service center.

Stowing the Mobility System1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 of the sealant

bottle from the wheel.2. Unscrew the compressor connection hose 6

from the sealant bottle.3. Connect the filling hose 2 of the sealant

bottle with the free connector on the seal‐ant bottle.This prevents left-over sealant from escap‐ing from the bottle.

4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitablematerial to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐cle.

Distributing the sealantDrive approx. 3.1 miles/5 km to evenly distrib‐ute the sealant.Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Ifpossible, do not drop below a speed of10 mph/20 km/h.

Correcting the tire inflation pressure1. After driving approx. 3.1 miles/5 km, or

about 10 minutes, stop in a suitable loca‐tion.

2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com‐pressor directly onto the tire valve.

3. Insert the connector 5 into the powersocket in the passenger compartment.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to1.8 bar/26 psi. When the engine is running:▷ To increase the inflation pressure:

switch on the compressor. To check thecurrently set inflation pressure, switchoff the compressor.

▷ To reduce the inflation pressure: pressthe release button 9.

Seite 162

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 165: 2015 countryman

Do not allow the compressor to run toolong

Do not allow the compressor to run longer than10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheatand may be damaged.◀

If the inflation pressure is not maintained, takethe vehicle on another drive, distributing thesealant, refer to page 162. Then repeat steps1 to 4 once.If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is stillnot reached, the tire is too heavily damaged.Contact the nearest service center.

Continuing the tripNote the maximum speedDo not exceed the maximum speed of

50 mph/80 km/h; otherwise, accidents can oc‐cur.◀

Replace the defective tire as soon as possibleand have the wheel balanced.Have the Mobility System refilled.

Snow chainsOnly certain fine-link snow chains have beentested by MINI, classified as safe for use, andrecommended. Consult your service center formore information.Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equippedwith tires of the following size:195/60 R 16 M+SWith ALL4 all-wheel drive: only mount snowchains on the front wheels.Observe the manufacturer's instructions whenmounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speedof 30 mph or 50 km/h when using snow chains.Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snowchains are mounted; otherwise, the instrumentmight issue an incorrect reading.

Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor ifsnow chains are mounted; otherwise, the in‐strument might issue an incorrect reading.When driving with snow chains, it may be use‐ful to temporarily deactivate DSC or activateDTC, refer to page 81.

Seite 163

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

163Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 166: 2015 countryman

Engine compartmentVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number2 Battery, under the cover  1793 Dip stick for engine oil  1664 Engine oil filler neck  166

5 Coolant expansion tank  1686 Engine compartment fuse box  1797 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlight

and window washer system  54

Seite 164

MOBILITY Engine compartment

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 167: 2015 countryman

HoodNotes

Working in the engine compartmentNever attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without thenecessary professional technical training.If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐lines, have any work on the vehicle performedonly by a service center.If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.◀

To avoid damage, make sure that thewiper arms are resting against the wind‐

shield before you open the engine compart‐ment. Do not open the engine hood before theengine has cooled down; otherwise, injuriesmay result.◀

Unlocking and opening the hood1. Pull the lever.

2. Lift the hood all the way.

3. Press the release handle and open thehood.

Danger of injury when the hood is openThere is a danger of injury from protrud‐

ing parts when the hood is open.◀

Closing the hood

Close the hood from a height of ap‐prox. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must beclearly heard to engage.

Hood open when drivingIf you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im‐mediately and close it securely.◀

Danger of pinchingMake sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Seite 165

Engine compartment MOBILITY

165Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 168: 2015 countryman

Engine oilEngine oilVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationEngine oil consumption depends on the drivingstyle and the conditions of use. A highly sportydriving style, for example, results in considera‐bly higher engine oil consumption.Therefore, regularly check the engine oil levelafter refueling.

Checking the oil level with a dip stick1. Park the vehicle on level ground when the

engine is at operating temperature, i.e., af‐ter driving continuously for at least6 2 miles/10 km.

2. Switch the engine off.3. After approx. 5 minutes, pull out the dip

stick and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth,paper towel, etc.

4. Carefully insert the dip stick all the way intothe measuring tube and pull it out again.

The oil level must be between the twomarks on the dip stick.

The oil quantity between the two marks on thedip stick equals approx. 1 US quart/1 liter.

Do not exceed the high mark.Do not exceed the high mark of the dip

stick. Overfilling oil damages the engine.◀

Adding engine oil

Filler neck

Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 literof oil only after the corresponding message ap‐pears on the Control Display or, in diesel en‐gines, after the oil level is just above the lowmark of the dip stick, refer to page 166.

Add oil promptlyAdd oil within the next 30 miles/50 km;

otherwise, engine damage could result.◀

Seite 166

MOBILITY Engine oil

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 169: 2015 countryman

Too much engine oilHave the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐age.◀

Protect childrenKeep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐

dren and heed the warnings on the containersto prevent health risks.◀

Oil types for refilling

NotesNo oil additivesDo not use oil additives as these may

cause engine damage.◀

Viscosity classes of engine oilsWhen selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE viscos‐ity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, ormalfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of theengine.

Approved oil types

Gasoline engine

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Further information on approved oil types canbe obtained from the service center.

Alternative oil typesIf the approved engine oils are not available, upto 1 US quart/1 liter of an oil with the followingspecification can be used:Gasoline engine

API SM or a higher quality standard

Engine oil changeThe manufacturer of your vehicle recommendshaving the engine oil changed by a service cen‐ter.

Seite 167

Engine oil MOBILITY

167Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 170: 2015 countryman

CoolantVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationDanger of burns from hot engineDo not open the cooling system while the

engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant maycause burns.◀

Suitable additivesOnly use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives areharmful to your health.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.Not all commercially available additives aresuitable for your MINI vehicle. Ask your servicecenter for suitable additives.

Coolant temperatureIf the coolant and therefore the engine over‐heat, a warning lamp lights up, refer topage 191.

Coolant levelChecking1. Do not open the hood until the engine has

cooled down.2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐

wise slightly to allow any accumulatedpressure to escape; then continue turningto open.

3. The coolant level is correct if it is betweenthe markings. The markings are located onthe side of the coolant reservoir.

Refilling1. Do not open the hood until the engine has

cooled down.2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐

wise slightly to allow any accumulatedpressure to escape, then continue turningto open.

3. If the coolant level is low, slowly add cool‐ant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

4. Twist the cap closed.5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐

nated as soon as possible.

DisposalComply with the appropriate environ‐mental protection regulations when dis‐

posing of coolant additives.

Seite 168

MOBILITY Coolant

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 171: 2015 countryman

MaintenanceVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

MINI maintenance system

The MINI maintenance system provides infor‐mation on required maintenance measures andthus provides support in maintaining roadsafety and the operational reliability of the ve‐hicle.

Condition Based ServiceCBSSensors and special algorithms take into ac‐count the various driving conditions of yourMINI. Based on this, Condition Based Servicedetermines the current and future mainte‐nance requirements.

The system makes it possible to adapt theamount of maintenance you need to your userprofile.Detailed information on service requirementscan be displayed in the tachometer, refer topage 63.

Service data in the remote controlInformation on the required maintenance iscontinuously stored in the remote control. Yourservice center will read out this data and sug‐gest the right array of service procedures foryour vehicle. Therefore, hand your service spe‐cialist the remote control that you used mostrecently.

Setting the correct dateMake sure the date is set correctly; other‐

wise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition BasedService is not ensured.◀

Service and Warranty In‐formation Booklet forUS models and Warrantyand Service Guide Book‐let for Canadian modelsPlease consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐mation Booklet for US models and Warrantyand Service Guide Booklet for Canadian modelsfor additional information on service require‐ments.Maintenance and repair should be performedby your service center. Make sure to have regu‐lar maintenance procedures recorded in the ve‐hicle's Service and Warranty Information Book‐let for US models, and in the Warranty andService Guide Booklet for Canadian models.These entries are proof of regular maintenance.

Seite 169

Maintenance MOBILITY

169Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 172: 2015 countryman

Socket for OBD OnboardDiagnosis

Socket for Onboard DiagnosisThe socket for Onboard Diagnosis may

only be used by the service center, by work‐shops that operate according to the specifica‐tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro‐priately trained personnel, and by otherauthorized persons. Otherwise, its use maylead to vehicle malfunctions.◀

Primary components in the vehicle emissionscan be checked via the OBD socket using a de‐vice.

EmissionsThe warning lamps light up. The vehicleis producing higher emissions. You cancontinue your journey, but moderate

your speed and exercise due caution. Have thevehicle checked as soon as possible.

Under certain circumstances, one of the lampsflashes or lights up continuously. This indicatesthat there is excessive misfiring or a malfunc‐tion in the engine. If this happens, reduce thevehicle speed and drive to the next service cen‐ter promptly. Serious engine misfiring within abrief period can seriously damage emissioncontrol components, in particular the catalyticconverter. In addition, the mechanical enginecomponents may become damaged.

If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight‐ened, the OBD system may conclude

that fuel vapor is escaping; this will cause a dis‐play to light up. If the filler cap is then tight‐ened, the display should go out in a few days.

Seite 170

MOBILITY Maintenance

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 173: 2015 countryman

Replacing componentsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Wiper blade replacementGeneral information

Do not fold down the wipers withoutwiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper bladeshave not been installed; this may damage thewindshield.◀

Replacing the front wiper blades1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and

fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

3. Take the wiper blade out of the catchmechanism toward the front.

4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixationuntil it engages audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.Risk of damageBefore opening the hood, ensure that the

wiper arms with wiper blades are folded ontothe window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀

Changing the rear wiper bladeMINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back, ar‐

row.3. Press the wiper blade against the stop to

push it out of the fixation.4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixation

until it engages audibly.5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Seite 171

Replacing components MOBILITY

171Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 174: 2015 countryman

Lamp and bulb replace‐mentNotes

Lamps and bulbsLamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐tion to vehicle safety. Therefore, exercise cau‐tion when handling lights and bulbs.The manufacturer of the vehicle recommendsthat you entrust corresponding procedures tothe service center if you are unfamiliar withthem or they are not described here.You can obtain a selection of replacementbulbs at the service center.

Danger of burnsOnly change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of gettingburned.◀

Working on the lighting systemWhen working on the lighting system,

you should always switch off the lights affectedto prevent short circuits.To avoid possible injury or equipment damagewhen replacing bulbs, observe any instructionsprovided by the bulb manufacturer.◀

Do not touch the bulbsDo not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts ofcontamination will burn into the bulb's surfaceand reduce its service life.Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,or hold the bulb by its base.◀

Caring for the headlights, refer to page 187.For bulb replacement that is not describedhere, please contact the service center or aworkshop that works according to the repairprocedures of the manufacturer with corre‐spondingly trained personnel.

For checking and adjusting headlight aim,please contact your MINI dealer.

Light-emitting diodes LEDsIn some equipment, the light source is providedby light-emitting diodes behind a cover.These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐tional lasers, are designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the coversDo not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀

Headlight glassCondensation can form on the inside of theheadlights in cool or humid weather. When thelight is switched on, the condensation evapo‐rates after a short time. The headlights do notneed to be changed.If the condensation in the headlights does notevaporate after trips with the lights switchedon, and the amount of moisture in the head‐lights increases, for example if water dropletsform, have them checked by your service cen‐ter.

Bi-xenon headlightsThese bulbs have a very long life and the likeli‐hood of failure is very low, provided that theyare not switched on and off excessively. If abulb should nevertheless fail, you can continuedriving cautiously with the front fog lights, pro‐vided this is permitted by local laws.

Do not perform work/bulb replacementon xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system,including bulb replacement, performed only bya service center.Due to the high voltage present in the system,there is the danger of fatal injuries if work iscarried out improperly.◀

Seite 172

MOBILITY Replacing components

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 175: 2015 countryman

Front lights, bulb replacement

At a glance

Headlights

1 Low beams/high-beams2 Turn signal

Lower front lights

1 Parking lights2 Daytime running lights or fog lights

Lower LED front lights

1 Parking lights / daytime running lights2 Fog lights

Halogen low beams and high-beamsH13 bulb, 60/55 watt

Wear protective goggles and glovesHalogen bulbs are pressurized. Therefore,

wear protective goggles and gloves. Otherwise,there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is acci‐dentally damaged during replacement.◀

Attach the cover carefullyWhen attaching the cover, proceed care‐

fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam‐age to the headlamp system.◀

Access to the bulbs through the enginecompartmentFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 172.Low beam/high-beam bulbs can be changedfrom the engine compartment.

Seite 173

Replacing components MOBILITY

173Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 176: 2015 countryman

To remove the cover:

1. Press the tab.2. Fold away the cover and take it out of the

holder.Proceed in reverse order to attach the cover.

Attach the cover carefullyWhen attaching the cover, proceed care‐

fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam‐age to the headlamp system.◀

Replacing the bulb1. Turn the bulb counterclockwise, arrow 1,

and remove it, arrow 2.

2. Press the release, arrow 1, and pull off theconnector, arrow 2.

3. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover inreverse order.

LED parking lights/LED fog lights/LEDdaytime running lightsFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 172.Lights are implemented using LED technology.Contact your service center in the event of amalfunction.

Turn signals/parking lights/roadsideparking lights/fog lights/and daytimerunning lights

Access to the bulbs via the wheel housingFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 172.

1 Turn signal2 Parking lights/roadside parking lights/fog

lights/and daytime running lights

Replacing the turn signal bulb21-watt bulb, P 21 W, or PY 21 W

1. Turn the wheel.2. Remove cover 1.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.

Seite 174

MOBILITY Replacing components

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 177: 2015 countryman

3. Remove the inside cover. To do this, turnthe cover counterclockwise.

4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re‐move it.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the coversin reverse order.

Replacing the parking light bulb androadside parking light bulb5-watt bulb, W 5 W

1. Turn the wheel.2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.

3. Turn the upper bulb counterclockwise andremove it.

4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover inreverse order.

Replacing the front fog light bulbH8 bulb, 35 watt

1. Turn the wheel.2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.4. Turn the lower bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover inreverse order.

Replacing the daytime running light bulbBulb PSX24W

1. Turn the wheel.2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.

Seite 175

Replacing components MOBILITY

175Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 178: 2015 countryman

4. Squeeze the lower bulb at both tabs andpull out.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover inreverse order.

Lateral turn signals5-watt bulb, W 5 W

1. Open the hood.

2. Squeeze the clip, arrows, and remove thebulb holder.

3. Remove the bulb by turning it to the leftand replace it.

4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover inreverse order.

Side marker lightsTo replace these bulbs, contact the service cen‐ter.

Tail lights, bulb replacementFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 172.Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, PY 21 W

MINI Countryman

1 Brake/tail light2 Turn signal3 Brake/tail light4 Backup light

MINI Paceman

1 Brake light2 Tail light3 Turn signal4 Backup light

ReplacingAll bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.

MINI Countryman1. Switch off the lights and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock.2. Open the tailgate.

Seite 176

MOBILITY Replacing components

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 179: 2015 countryman

3. Press the cover out of the cargo area sidepanel at the rear and remove it.

4. Detach the emergency release of the fuelfiller flap, refer to page 148, and push itaside with the foam insert.Ensure that the emergency release is notdamaged.

5. Disengage the bulb holder by pushingdown the clip, arrow 1.

6. Take out the bulb holder and detach thecable, arrow 2.

7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb whileturning it to the left and remove it.

8. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulbholder in reverse order. Ensure that thebulb holder engages in all fasteners.

9. Return the foam insert to its original posi‐tion and reattach the emergency release ofthe fuel filler flap.

10. Reattach the cover.

MINI Paceman1. Switch off the lights and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock.2. Open the tailgate.3. Remove the cover from the cargo area side

trim.

4. Unlock the fastening elements, arrows 1, byturning.

5. Remove the screws, arrows 2, using the hexkey from the vehicle document portfolio.

6. Remove the tail light.7. Disengage the bulb holder by pushing

down the clip, arrows 1.

8. Take out the bulb holder and detach thecable, arrow 2.

Seite 177

Replacing components MOBILITY

177Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 180: 2015 countryman

9. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb whileturning it to the left and remove it.

10. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulbholder in reverse order. Ensure that thebulb holder engages in all fasteners.

License plate lights5-watt bulb, C 5 W

Replacing

MINI Countryman1. Push the light to the left in the catch of the

light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐row 1.

2. Take out the light, arrow 2.3. Replace the bulb.4. Insert the light.

MINI Paceman1. Push the light to the left in the catch of the

light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐row 1.

2. Take out the light, arrow 2.

3. Replace the bulb.4. Insert the light.

Center brake lightThis light uses LED technology for operation. Incase of a defect, please contact your servicecenter or a workshop that works according tothe repair procedures of the manufacturer ofyour MINI with correspondingly trained person‐nel.

Changing wheelsNotesThe vehicle may be equipped with conven‐tional tires with the Mobility System, refer topage 161, or with run-flat tires, refer topage 160.No spare tire is available in the case of a flattire.Suitable tools for changing the wheels areavailable from the service center as an acces‐sory.

Jacking points for the vehicle jackMINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Seite 178

MOBILITY Replacing components

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 181: 2015 countryman

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐cated in the positions shown.

Vehicle batteryMaintenanceThe battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐trolyte will last for the life of the battery in tem‐perate climate conditions.The service center will be happy to answer anyquestions on the battery.

Battery replacementUse approved vehicle batteriesOnly use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged andsystems or functions may not be fully availa‐ble.◀

Have the vehicle battery registered by the serv‐ice center after it is replaced to ensure that allcomfort functions are available without restric‐tions and that any associated Check Controlmessages are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery

NoteDo not connect the charger to the socketDo not connect the battery charger to the

socket installed in the vehicle at the factory asthis could damage the battery.◀

Only charge the battery in the vehicle when theengine is switched off. Connections, refer topage 181.

General informationEnsure that the battery is sufficiently charged toachieve the full battery life.It may be necessary to charge the battery inthe following cases:▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to

travel short distances.▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for

more than one month.

Power failureAfter a temporary power failure, some equip‐ment will be restricted in its use and will needto be reinitialized. In addition, certain individualsettings will be lost and must be updated:▷ Time and date: the values must be up‐

dated, refer to page 62.▷ Radio: the stations need to be stored again,

refer to page 126.▷ Glass sunroof, electrical: it may only be pos‐

sible to tilt the roof. The system needs to beinitialized. Contact the service center.

Disposing of old batteriesHave used batteries disposed of by theservice center after they are replaced ortake them to a recycling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position fortransport and storage. Secure the battery sothat it does not tip over during transport.

FusesReplacing fusesNever attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐tute of another color or amperage rating; this

Seite 179

Replacing components MOBILITY

179Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 182: 2015 countryman

could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀

Fuses should be replaced by the service center.Information on the fuses can be found on theinside of the covers.

In the engine compartment

Opening the coverPress the snap lock.

In interior

On the right side of the footwell.

Opening the coverPush out at the recess.

Seite 180

MOBILITY Replacing components

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 183: 2015 countryman

Breakdown assistanceVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Hazard warning flash‐ers

The button is located on the speedometer.

Warning triangle

Under the loading edge in the cargo area.

To remove, open the two fasteners.

First aid kitSome of the articles contained in the first aid kithave a limited service life. Therefore, check theuse-by dates of the contents regularly and re‐place the items before they expire.

The first aid kit is located in the left side trim onthe cargo area floor or under the loading floor.

Roadside AssistanceService availabilityRoadside Assistance can be reached around theclock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐down.

Roadside AssistanceA phone number for Roadside Assistance canbe displayed, refer to page 142, via the radio.

Jump-startingNotesIf the battery is discharged, the engine can bestarted using the battery of another vehicle and

Seite 181

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

181Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 184: 2015 countryman

two jumper cables. In the same way, you canhelp jump-start another vehicle. Only usejumper cables with fully insulated clamp han‐dles.To prevent personal injury or damage to bothvehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐dure.

Do not touch live partsTo avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,

always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐nents while the engine is running.◀

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in‐formation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/powerconsumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehiclesThere must not be any contact between

the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise thereis a danger of shorting.◀

Connecting jumper cablesConnecting orderConnect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injuryfrom sparking.◀

1. Open the battery cover in the engine com‐partment to access the positive terminal.

2. Unlock the tabs of the positive terminalcover on the left and right, arrows 1, andraise the cover, arrow 2.

3. Attach one terminal clamp of the positivejumper cable to the positive terminal of thebattery or to a starting aid terminal of thevehicle providing assistance.

4. Attach the second clamp of the positivejumper cable to the positive terminal of thebattery of the vehicle to be started.

5. Attach one terminal clamp of the negativejumper cable to the negative terminal ofthe battery, or to the corresponding engineor body ground of the vehicle providing as‐sistance.

6. Attach the second clamp of the negativejumper cable to the negative terminal of

Seite 182

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 185: 2015 countryman

the battery, or to the engine or bodyground of the vehicle to be started.

Body ground:

Starting the engineNever use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle andlet it run for several minutes at a slightly in‐creased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle being startedin the usual way.If the first starting attempt is not successful,wait a few minutes before making anotherattempt in order to allow the dischargedbattery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes.4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse

order.Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towingNotes

Observe applicable laws and regulationsObserve applicable laws and regulations

for tow-starting and towing.◀

No additional passengersDo not transport any passengers other

than the driver in a vehicle that is beingtowed.◀

Using a tow fittingThe screw-in tow fitting must always be carriedin the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the frontor rear of the MINI.The tow fitting is stowed in the following loca‐tion, depending on the equipment:▷ Under the right or left front seat.▷ In the pouch of the wheel change set in the

cargo area.Tow fitting, information on use▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in.▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and thevehicle can occur.◀

Access to the screw threadPush out the tow fitting cover at the appropri‐ate recess in the bumper.

Front

Seite 183

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

183Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 186: 2015 countryman

Rear

Being towedFollow the towing instructionsFollow all towing instructions, or vehicle

damage or accidents may occur.◀

▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turnsignals, and windshield wipers may be un‐available.

▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axletilted, as the front wheels could turn.

▷ When the engine is stopped, there is nopower assist. Consequently, more forceneeds to be applied when braking andsteering.

▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐quired.

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐pending on local regulations.

Manual transmissionGearshift lever in neutral position.

Steptronic transmissionTowing vehicles with a Steptronic trans‐mission

Only transport vehicles with a Steptronic trans‐mission on tow trucks or with raised frontwheels; otherwise, the transmission may bedamaged.◀

Towing with a tow barLight towing vehicleThe towing vehicle must not be lighter

than your vehicle, or it will not be possible tocontrol vehicle response.◀

Correctly attach the tow barOnly secure the tow bar on the tow fit‐

tings; damage can occur when it is secured onother parts of the vehicle.◀

The tow fittings used should be on the sameside on both vehicles.Should it prove impossible to avoid mountingthe tow bar at an offset angle, please observethe following:▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will

be sharply limited during cornering.▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is attached offset.

Towing with a tow ropeWhen starting to tow the vehicle, make surethat the tow rope is taut.To avoid jerking and the associated stresses onthe vehicle components when towing, alwaysuse nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctlyOnly secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it issecured on other parts of the vehicle.◀

With a tow truck: vehicles without ALL4all-wheel drive

Do not lift the vehicleDo not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damagemay result.◀

Seite 184

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 187: 2015 countryman

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Have the vehicle transported with a tow truckwith a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

With a tow truck: vehicle with ALL4 all-wheel drive

Do not lift the vehicleDo not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damagemay result.◀

Note for vehicles with ALL4 all-wheeldrive

Do not tow a vehicle with ALL4 all-wheel drivewith just the front or rear axle raised; other‐wise, the wheels could lock up and the transfercase could be damaged.◀

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Only transport the vehicle on a flat-bed.

Tow-startingIf possible, start the engine by jump-starting,refer to page 181, it rather than tow-startingthe vehicle. Vehicles with a catalytic convertershould only be tow-started when the engine iscold; vehicles with an automatic transmissioncannot be tow-started.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system andcomply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.3. Engage third gear.4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the

clutch is depressed and then slowly releasethe clutch. After the engine starts, immedi‐ately depress the clutch completely again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the towbar or rope, and switch off the hazardwarning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 185

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

185Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 188: 2015 countryman

CareVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Car washesNotes

Steam jets or high-pressure washersWhen using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance awayand use a maximum temperature of140 ℉/60 ℃.Holding them too close or using excessivelyhigh pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐age or preliminary damage that may then leadto long-term damage.Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.◀

Do not direct steam or high-pressure washerstoward the labels applied by the manufacturer;otherwise, damage may result.

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pres‐sure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do notspray the seals of the retractable hardtop andthe exterior sensors and cameras, for Park Dis‐tance Control, for instance, for extended peri‐ods of time and only from a distance of at least12 in/30 cm.◀

During the winter monthsEnsure that the vehicle is washed more

frequently in winter. Intense soiling and roadsalt can damage the vehicle.◀

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakesbriefly to dry them; otherwise, braking actioncan be reduced and corrosion of the brakediscs can occur.Regularly remove foreign bodies, such asleaves, from the area of the windshield whenthe hood is open.

Washing in automatic car washesGive preference to cloth car washes or thosethat use soft brushes in order to avoid paintdamage.Do not use automatic high-pressure washers;otherwise, water may drip into the interior inthe area of the windows.Before driving into the car wash, check whetherthe system is suitable for your MINI. Note thefollowing points:▷ Vehicle dimensions, refer to page 206.▷ If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, re‐

fer to page 40.▷ Maximum permissible tire width.

Guide rails in car washesAvoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle chassiscould be damaged.◀

Preparations before driving into the car wash:▷ Unscrew the road antenna.▷ Deactivate the rain sensor to avoid unin‐

tentional wiper activation.▷ Deactivate the rear window wiper and pro‐

tect it from damage. Ask the car wash oper‐ator about any necessary protective meas‐ures.

Seite 186

MOBILITY Care

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 189: 2015 countryman

▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, ifthere is a risk that these may be damaged.

▷ Insert the remote control into the ignitionlock.

Steptronic transmissionBefore driving into the car wash, note the fol‐lowing to ensure that the vehicle can roll:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignitionlock, even with Comfort Access.

2. Move the selector lever to position N.3. Release the parking brake.4. Switch the engine off.5. Leave the remote control in the ignition

lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Hand car washIf washing the vehicle by hand, use copiousquantities of water and car shampoo if neces‐sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or awashing brush by applying gentle pressure.Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate therain sensor to avoid unintentional wiper activa‐tion or switch off the ignition.

Adhere to the local regulations regardingwashing cars by hand.

HeadlightsDo not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caus‐tic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled,e.g., due to insects, with shampoo and rinse offwith copious quantities of water.Thaw ice with a window deicer; do not use anice scraper.

WindowsClean the outside and inside surfaces of thewindows and the mirror glasses with windowcleaner.

Do not clean mirror glass with cleaners contain‐ing quartz.

Wiper bladesClean with soapy water and replace regularly toavoid streaking.Wax and preservative residue and soiling onthe windows cause streaking during windowwiping and lead to premature wear on thewiper blades and malfunctions of the rain sen‐sor.

Vehicle careCar care productsRegular cleaning and care contributes signifi‐cantly to vehicle value retention.The manufacturer recommends using cleaningand care products from MINI, since these havebeen tested and approved.Original MINI CareProducts have been testedon materials, in the laboratory, and in the field,and offer optimum care and protection for MINIvehicles.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcoholor solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol orsolvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-dutygrease removers, fuel, or such; this could leadto surface damage.◀

Car care and cleaning productsFollow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors orwindows.Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐cles.Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐gerous and harmful to your health.◀

Seite 187

Care MOBILITY

187Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 190: 2015 countryman

Vehicle paintRegular care contributes to vehicle value reten‐tion and protects the paintwork against thelong-term effects of paint-damaging substan‐ces.Environmental influences in areas with higherair pollution or natural contaminants, such astree resin or pollen, can have an impact on thevehicle paint. Therefore, it is important to tailorthe frequency and extent of your car care tothese influences.Immediately remove especially aggressive sub‐stances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or birddroppings, to prevent damage to the paint‐work.

Correcting paint damageDepending on the severity of the damage, re‐pair stone impact damage or scratches imme‐diately to prevent rust formation.The manufacturer recommends having paintdamage corrected with a professional repairpaint job according to factory specifications us‐ing original MINI paint materials.

PreservationPreservation is needed when water no longerbeads off of the clean paint surfaces. Only usepaint preservation products that contain car‐nauba or synthetic waxes.

Caring for matte finishes▷ Do not use paint cleaners or gloss protec‐

tion agents such as car wax.▷ Do not polish the surface or use abrasive

products, as these may cause the finish tobecome glossy.

Leather careThe leather processed by the manufacturer is ahigh quality natural product. Light graininess isa typical feature of natural leather.

Particles of dust and road grime chafe in poresand folds, and lead to increased wear and pre‐mature degradation of the leather surface.Therefore, remove dust from the leather regu‐larly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.Make especially sure that light-colored leatheris cleaned regularly as it is more susceptible tosoiling.Twice a year, treat the leather with a leather lo‐tion as dirt and grease will attack the protectivelayer of the leather.

Upholstery material careVacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to re‐move superficial soiling.In case of heavy soiling, e.g., beverage stains,use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth incombination with a suitable interior cleaner.Follow the instructions on the container.Clean the upholstery material down to theseams using large sweeping motions. Avoidrubbing the material vigorously.

Damage from Velcro® fastenersOpen Velcro® fasteners on pants or other

articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀

Caring for special components

Interior plastic partsThese include:▷ Imitation leather surfaces▷ Lamp lenses▷ Indicator covers▷ Matte componentsClean with water and a solvent-free plasticcleaner if necessary.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcoholor solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol orsolvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty

Seite 188

MOBILITY Care

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 191: 2015 countryman

grease removers, fuel, or such; this could leadto surface damage.◀

Rubber sealsOnly treat with water or a rubber care product.When cleaning rubber seals, do not use siliconesprays or other care products containing sili‐cone; otherwise, noise and damage may result.

Chrome surfacesCarefully clean components such as the radia‐tor grille or door handles with an ample supplyof water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ularly when they have been exposed to roadsalt. For additional treatment, use a chromepolish.

Light-alloy wheelsWhen cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, onlyuse a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH valueof 5 to 9.Do not use abrasive cleaners or a steam jet hot‐ter than 140 ℉/60 ℃; otherwise, damage mayresult. Adhere to the manufacturer instructions.Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may de‐stroy the protective coating of neighboringcomponents such as the brake disc.

Exterior sensorsThe sensors on the outside of the vehicle, suchas for Park Distance Control, must be kept cleanand free of ice to ensure that they remain fullyfunctional.

Decorative trimClean decorative trims and fine wood compo‐nents with a moist cloth only. Then dry with asoft cloth.

Safety beltsDirty belt straps impede the reeling action andthus have a negative impact on safety.

No chemical cleaningDo not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.◀

Carpets/floor matsNo objects in the area around the pedalsKeep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;otherwise, the function of the pedals could beimpeded while drivingDo not place additional floor mats over existingmats or other objects.Only use floor mats that have been approvedfor the vehicle and can be properly fixed inplace.Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastenedagain when they are returned after being re‐moved, such as for cleaning.◀

Floor mats can be removed for cleaning.If they are very dirty, clean with a microfibercloth and water or an interior cleaner. To pre‐vent matting of the carpet, rub back and forthin the direction of travel only.

DisplaysTo clean the displays, such as the radio or dis‐play elements, use an antistatic microfibercloth.

Cleaning displaysDo not use chemical or household cleans‐

ers.Keep all fluids and moisture away from theunit.Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐ces or electrical components.Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and donot use abrasive materials; otherwise, damagecan result.◀

Seite 189

Care MOBILITY

189Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 192: 2015 countryman

CD/DVD drivesNo cleaning CDDo not use cleaning CDs; otherwise, parts

of the drive may become damaged.◀

Long-term vehicle storageYour service center can advise you on what toconsider when storing the vehicle for longerthan three months.

Seite 190

MOBILITY Care

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 193: 2015 countryman

Indicator/warning lampsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

OverviewThe indicator and warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors in displayarea 1 or 2. The table contains information oncauses and how to respond. Note whether alamp lights up alone or in combination with an‐other. Some lights can light up in different col‐ors. Corresponding distinctions are made in thetext.

1 2 Cause How to respond

Turn signal

The high-beams/headlight flasher areswitched on.

The front fog lamps are switched on.

The rear fog lights are switched on.

Fasten safety belts. Fasten safety belt, refer to page 39.

External temperature warning Drive conservatively, refer topage 58.

Seite 191

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

191Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 194: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

Lights up briefly:Approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters of fuel remain inthe tank.Remains on:The remaining range is no more than30 miles/50 km, refer to page 59.

The engine refuses to start. Depress the brake or clutch to startthe engine, refer to page 49.

The ignition is switched on and driver's dooris open.

Switch off the ignition, refer topage 48, or close the driver's door.

The lights are still switched on. Switch off the lights, refer topage 66.

The roadside parking lamps are still on. Switch off the roadside parkinglights, refer to page 67.

A door is open.

The hood is open.

The tailgate is open.

The fuel cap is missing or loose. Make sure that the fuel cap is cor‐rectly positioned and close it until itclicks audibly. Do not jam the strapbetween the fuel cap and the vehi‐cle.

The windshield washer fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid, refer to page 54,as soon as possible.

Lights up in red:

Service is due. Arrange a service appointment.Check the service requirements, re‐fer to page 169.

Seite 192

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 195: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

Lights up in yellow:

The engine will start the next time the Start/Stop button is touched, possibly without thebrake or clutch being depressed.

The remote control is malfunctioning or, incars with Comfort Access, was not detected.

The engine cannot be started. Havethe remote control checked, if nec‐essary.

The battery in the remote control is dis‐charged.

Use the remote control for a longerjourney or, in cars with Comfort Ac‐cess, replace the battery.

The belt tensioners and/or airbag systemhas failed.

Have the system checked immedi‐ately.Fasten the safety belts anyway.

Steering assistance has failed. You can continue your journey, butmoderate your speed and exercisedue caution. Markedly differentsteering response. Have the systemchecked as soon as possible.

Lights up in red:

Engine malfunction Stop the car and switch off the en‐gine. You cannot continue yourjourney. Contact your service cen‐ter.

Lights up in yellow:

Full engine power is no longer available. You can continue your journey, butmoderate your speed and exercisedue caution. Have the enginechecked as soon as possible.

Indicator lamp 1 flashes:

Engine malfunction under high load. Highengine load will result in damage to the cat‐alytic converter.

You can continue your journey, butmoderate your speed and exercisedue caution. Have the vehiclechecked immediately.

Seite 193

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

193Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 196: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

Indicator lamp 1 lights up:

Engine malfunction with adverse effect onemissions.

You can continue your journey, butmoderate your speed and exercisedue caution. Have the vehiclechecked as soon as possible.

Lights up in red:

The engine is overheating. Carefully bring the car to a stop,switch off the engine and allow it tocool down. Do not open the hood;otherwise, there would be a risk ofinjury due to scalding. Contact yourservice center.

Lights up in yellow:

The engine is too hot. Continue driving at more moderatespeed so that the engine can cooldown. Have the engine checkedwithout delay if the situation reoc‐curs.

Lights up in red:

Battery is no longer being charged. Alterna‐tor malfunction.

Switch off all unnecessary electricalconsumers. Have the power supplysystem checked without delay.

Lights up in yellow:

The battery charge level is very low, the bat‐tery is old or is not securely connected.

Charge the battery by taking a longdrive or using an external charger.If necessary, switch off automaticpower consumers. Have the batterychecked as soon as possible.

Indication in US modelsThe parking brake is set.

Indication in Canadian modelsThe parking brake is set.

Seite 194

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 197: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

Indication in US modelsThe parking brake is set while driving.

Release the parking brake.

Indication in Canadian modelsThe parking brake is set while driving.

Release the parking brake.

Indication in US models

Lights up in red:The brake fluid level is too low.

Reduced braking effect, stop thecar carefully. Contact the nearestservice center.

Indication in Canadian models

Lights up in red:The brake fluid level is too low.

Reduced braking effect, stop thecar carefully. Contact the nearestservice center.

Indication in US models.

Brake pads worn. Have the condition of the brakepads checked without delay.

Indication in Canadian models

Brake pads worn. Have the condition of the brakepads checked without delay.

Indication in US models

The vehicle electronics have failed. You cannot continue your journey.Contact your service center.

Seite 195

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

195Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 198: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

Indication in Canadian models

The vehicle electronics have failed. You cannot continue your journey.Contact your service center.

Lights up in red: Have the system in questionchecked immediately.

The starter has failed or The engine cannot be restarted.

Ignition malfunctioning. The engine canonly be restarted when the brake is de‐pressed orLighting system failed. Low beams/tail lightsand brake lights still operational. All otherlights failed.

Depress the brake to restart the en‐gine.

Lights up in yellow:

Brake light control failed orThe fuel supply is malfunctioning.

You can continue your journey, butmoderate your speed and exercisedue caution. Have the system inquestion checked immediately.

Drive malfunctioning. You can continue your journey, butmoderate your speed and exercisedue caution. Transmission limp-home program with reduced accel‐eration is active. Have the systemchecked immediately.

Flashing:Dynamic Stability Control DSC or DynamicTraction Control DTC is controlling drive andbraking forces, refer to page 81.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated,refer to page 82.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC and DynamicTraction Control DTC are deactivated, referto page 81.

Driving stability limited during ac‐celeration and cornering.Driving style must be readjusted.

Seite 196

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 199: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

Dynamic Stability Control DSC and DynamicTraction Control DTC failed.

Driving stability limited during ac‐celeration and cornering.You can continue your journey, butmoderate your speed and exercisedue caution. Have the systemchecked as soon as possible.

ALL4 all-wheel drive failed. It is possible to continue driving.Drive cautiously and defensively.Avoid operating on poor roads andusing the full throttle and kickdownpositions of the accelerator. Havethe system checked immediately.

ALL4 all-wheel drive and DSC failed. It is possible to continue driving.Drive cautiously and defensively.Avoid operating on poor roads andusing the full throttle and kickdownpositions of the accelerator. Havethe system checked immediately.

Indication in US models

The driving stability control systems includ‐ing ABS and the Tire Pressure Monitor dis‐play have failed, refer to page 81.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐sively. Avoid full brake application,operation on poor roads, and useof full throttle and kickdown posi‐tions of the accelerator. Have thesystem checked immediately.

Indication in US models

Seite 197

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

197Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 200: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

The driving stability control systems includ‐ing ABS, ALL4 all-wheel drive, and the TirePressure Monitor display have failed, referto page 81.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐sively. Avoid full brake application,operation on poor roads, and useof full throttle and kickdown posi‐tions of the accelerator. Have thesystem checked immediately.

Indication in Canadian models

The driving stability control systems includ‐ing ABS and the Flat Tire Monitor or the TirePressure Monitor have failed, refer topage 81.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐sively. Avoid full brake application,operation on poor roads, and useof full throttle and kickdown posi‐tions of the accelerator. Have thesystem checked immediately.

Indication in Canadian models

The driving stability control systems includ‐ing ABS, ALL4 all-wheel drive, and the FlatTire Monitor or the Tire Pressure Monitorhave failed, refer to page 81.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐sively. Avoid full brake application,operation on poor roads, and useof full throttle and kickdown posi‐tions of the accelerator. Have thesystem checked immediately.

In vehicles with the Flat Tire Monitor

Light up in yellow and red:

A tire is deflated. Carefully bring the car to a stop.Additional information, refer topage 74.

Seite 198

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 201: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

The Flat Tire Monitor was not initialized. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, referto page 74.

Light up in yellow:

Flat Tire Monitor failed. Punctures are notindicated.

Have the system checked.

In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor

Light up in yellow and red:

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tirepressure.

Carefully bring the car to a stop.Additional information, refer topage 76.

In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor

Light up in yellow:

Tire Pressure Monitor not initialized. Check the inflation pressure and re‐set the system, refer to page 76.

The small light flashes yellow and then stayson, the large light lights up in yellow:

Tire Pressure Monitor failed. Punctures arenot indicated.

Have the system checked.

A wheel without TPM electronics ismounted.

Have the system checked.

TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due toother systems or devices using the sameradio frequency.

In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor

The small light flashes yellow and then stayson, the large light lights up in yellow:

Tire Pressure Monitor failed. Punctures arenot indicated.

Have the system checked.

A wheel without TPM electronics ismounted.

Have the system checked.

Seite 199

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

199Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 202: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

Lights up in red:

Transmission limp-home program activewith restricted range of gears, possibly withreduced acceleration.

You can continue your journey, butmoderate your speed and exercisedue caution. Have the systemchecked immediately.

Gears can be engaged without depressingthe brake.

Always depress the brake to en‐gage a gear.

Automatic selector lever locked: Manually unlock the selector leverlock, refer to page 57.

Lights up in yellow: Have the system checked as soonas possible.

Automatic selector lever locked:The selector lever is locked in position Pwith the engine running or the ignitionswitched on and the brake depressed or

Manually unlock the selector leverlock, refer to page 57.

The brake signal is malfunctioning: a gearcan be engaged without depressing thebrake.

To engage a gear while the vehicleis at a standstill, always depress thebrake. Before leaving the vehicle,move the selector lever to positionP and switch off the engine.

Lights up in red:

The transmission is overheating. Bring the car to a stop and movethe selector lever to position P. Al‐low the transmission to cool down.You can continue your journey, butmoderate your speed and exercisedue caution. Have the systemchecked if the situation reoccurs.

Lights up in yellow:

The transmission is too hot. Avoid high engine loads. You cancontinue your journey, but moder‐ate your speed and exercise duecaution.

Seite 200

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 203: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

Selector lever position P not engaged. Thevehicle is not secured against rolling.

Selector lever position P not engaged. Theignition cannot be switched off.

Engage selector lever position Pwhen you wish to switch off the ig‐nition, refer to page 48.

The cruise control system has failed. Have the system checked.

The Park Distance Control has failed. Have the system checked.

A bulb of the exterior lighting system hasfailed.

Have the exterior lighting checkedas soon as possible.

A low-beam headlight or front fog light hasfailed.

Have the lights checked as soon aspossible.

A high-beam headlight has failed. Have the high-beam headlightschecked.

A rear fog light has failed. Have the rear fog lights checked.

The headlight beam throw adjustment hasfailed.

Have the headlight beam throwadjustment system checked.

The Adaptive Light Control has failed.

The coolant level is too low. Add coolant immediately, refer topage 168.

The engine oil pressure is too low. Stop immediately and switch offthe engine. You cannot continueyour journey. Contact your servicecenter.

Lights up in red:

Seite 201

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

201Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 204: 2015 countryman

1 2 Cause How to respond

The service appointment is overdue. Arrange a service appointment.Check the service requirements, re‐fer to page 63.

Lights up in yellow:

Service is due. Arrange a service appointment.Check the service requirements, re‐fer to page 63.

No service due.

The set speed limit was exceeded.

The time and date are no longer correct. Set the time and date, refer topage 62.

Seite 202

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 205: 2015 countryman

Seite 203

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

203Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 206: 2015 countryman

FIND ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 207: 2015 countryman

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 208: 2015 countryman

Technical dataVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all series equipment aswell as country-specific and special equipmentoffered for this model series. Therefore, it alsodescribes equipment that may not be found inyour vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

NoteThe technical data and specifications in thisOwner's Manual are used as guidance values.The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,for example, due to the selected special equip‐ment, country version or country-specificmeasurement method. Detailed values can be

found in the approval documents, on informa‐tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtainedfrom the service center.The information in the vehicle documents al‐ways has priority.

DimensionsThe dimensions can vary depending on themodel version, equipment or country-specificmeasurement method.The specified heights do not take into accountattached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,for example, due to the selected special equip‐ment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI Countryman

MINI Countryman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996

Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789

Height inches/mm 61.7/1,566 61.7/1,566 61.4/1,560

LengthWith aerodynamic bumper

inches/mminches/mm

161.7/4,107-

162.2/4,119163.2/4,144

163.1/4,143

Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6

Seite 206

REFERENCE Technical data

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 209: 2015 countryman

MINI Paceman

MINI Paceman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996

Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786

Height inches/mm 60.4/1,533 60.4/1,533 60.1/1,527

LengthWith aerodynamic bumper

inches/mminches/mm

162.2/4,119-

162.4/4,124162.8/4,134

162.8/4,134

Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6

WeightsNever exceed either the approved axle loads orthe gross vehicle weight.

MINI Countryman

Cooper Cooper S

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,860/1,751 3,990/1,810

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,925/1,780 4,035/1,830

Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,060/934 2,145/973

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,125/964 2,200/998

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,920/871 1,920/871

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170

Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,100/1,860 4,155/1,885

Seite 207

Technical data REFERENCE

207Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 210: 2015 countryman

Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,145/1,880 4,200/1,905

Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,210/1,002 2,210/1,002

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,260/1,025 2,260/1,025

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,015/914 2,070/939

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170

MINI Paceman

Cooper Cooper S Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,850/1,746 3,960/1,796 4,100/1,860 4,150/1,882

Steptronic transmis‐sion

lbs/kg 3,920/1,778 4,010/1,819 4,140/1,878 4,200/1,905

Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376 830/376 830/376

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,120/962 2,180/989 2,200/998

Steptronic transmis‐sion

lbs/kg 2,120/962 2,170/984 2,220/1,007 2,240/1,016

Approved rear axleload

lbs/kg 1,910/866 1,910/866 2,020/916 2,060/934

Approved roof load ca‐pacity

lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter

13.9-40.7/330–1,080

13.9-40.7/330–1,080

13.9-40.7/330–1,080

13.9-40.7/330–1,080

Seite 208

REFERENCE Technical data

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 211: 2015 countryman

Capacities

Notes

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 12.4/47 Fuel quality, refer topage 150

Seite 209

Technical data REFERENCE

209Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 212: 2015 countryman

Everything from A to ZIndexAABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐

tem 81 Acoustic signal, refer to Check

Control 64 Activated charcoal filter with

automatic climate con‐trol 92

Adaptive Light Control 68 Additives, engine oil 167 Airbags 71 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 74 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐

culated air mode, air condi‐tioner 89

Air circulation, refer to Recir‐culated air mode, automaticclimate control 91

Air conditioning 88 Air conditioning mode, air

conditioner 88 Air conditioning mode, auto‐

matic climate control 90 Air distribution, air condi‐

tioner, manual 89 Air distribution, automatic 91 Air distribution, automatic cli‐

mate control, manual 92 Air distribution, individual 89 Air drying, refer to Cooling

function 92 Air flow rate for air condi‐

tioner 89 Air flow rate with automatic

climate control 91 Air pressure, refer to Tire infla‐

tion pressure 152 Air supply, air conditioner 88

Air supply, automatic climatecontrol 90

Alarm system 30 Alarm system, avoiding unin‐

tentional alarms 31 Alarm system, ending an

alarm 30 Alarm system, interior motion

sensor 31 Alarm system, tilt alarm sen‐

sor 31 ALL4 all-wheel system 83 All-wheel drive, refer to

ALL4 83 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 95 Ambient lighting 70 Antifreeze, washer fluid 54 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 81 Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐

namic Stability ControlDSC 81

Anti-theft protection 21 Approved engine oils 167 Ashtray 98 Assistance, roadside 181 Assistance when driving off,

refer to Hill drive-off assis‐tant 83

Assistance with starting en‐gine, refer to Jump-start‐ing 181

Automatic air distribution 91 Automatic air flow 91 Automatic car wash 186 Automatic climate control 90 Automatic climate control, au‐

tomatic air distribution 91 Automatic, cruise control 85

Automatic headlight con‐trol 66

Automatic transmission withSteptronic 55

AUTO program with auto‐matic climate control 91

AUX-IN port 130 Average fuel consumption 60 Average fuel consumption,

setting the units 61 Average speed 60 Average speed, refer to Com‐

puter 59

BBackrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 36 Backrests, refer to Seats 35 Backup lights, bulb replace‐

ment 176 Battery disposal 30 Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐

tery 179 Battery, remote control 20 Battery replacement, remote

control 30 Belts, refer to Safety belts 37 Belt tensioners, refer to Safety

belts 37 Bi-xenon headlights 172 Brake assistant 81 Brake discs, breaking in 110 Brake fluid, refer to Service re‐

quirements 63 Brake force distribution, elec‐

tronic 81 Brake pads, breaking in 110 Brake, refer to Parking

brake 50

Seite 210

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 213: 2015 countryman

Brakes, MINI maintenancesystem 169

Brakes, service require‐ments 63

Brake system, MINI mainte‐nance system 169

Braking, notes 111 Braking, parking brake 50 Breakdown assistance, Road‐

side Assistance 181 Breaking in 110 Buckle tongue, height adjust‐

ment 38 Button for starting the engine,

refer to Start/Stop button 48

CCalifornia Proposition 65

Warning 7 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 179 Car care products 187 Care, displays 189 Care, vehicle 187 Cargo area, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28 Cargo area door, refer to Tail‐

gate 26 Cargo area, enlarging, cargo

cover 100 Cargo area, flat loading

floor 102 Cargo area light, refer to Inte‐

rior lights 69 Cargo area, multi-function

hook 103 Cargo area, opening from the

outside 26 Cargo area, partition net 102 Car horn, refer to Horn 12 Carpet, care 189 Car phone, refer to Tele‐

phone 136 Car wash 186

CBC, Cornering Brake Con‐trol 81

CBS Condition Based Serv‐ice 169

CD/DVD drives, care 190 Center armrest 105 Center console, refer to

Around the center con‐sole 15

Center rail 105 Center rail, refer to Storage

compartments 105 Central locking, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28 Central locking from the in‐

side 25 Central locking system, con‐

cept 21 Central locking system, from

the outside 21 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 6 Changing wheels/tires 159 Check Control 64 Children, transporting 43 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 44 Child restraint fixing sys‐

tems 43 Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 43 Child seat, mounting 43 Child seats, refer to Transport‐

ing children safely 43 Chrome parts, care 189 Circulation of air, refer to Re‐

circulated air mode, air con‐ditioner 89

Circulation of air, refer to Re‐circulated air mode, auto‐matic climate control 91

Cleaning, displays 189 Cleaning, refer to Care 186 Climate 88 Climate mode, ventilation 93 Clock 58

Clock, 12h/24h mode 61 Closing from the inside 25 Closing, from the outside 22 Clutch, breaking in 110 Cockpit 12 Cold start, refer to Starting the

engine 49 Combination instrument, refer

to Displays 14 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signal/high-beams/headlight flasher 51

Combination switch, refer toWasher/wiper system 52

Comfort Access 28 Comfort Access, in the car

wash 29 Comfort Access, replacing the

battery 30 Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 15 Compartment for remote con‐

trol, refer to Ignition lock 48 Compass, digital 96 Computer 59 Computer, displaying informa‐

tion 59 Condition Based Service

CBS 169 Confirmation signals for vehi‐

cle locking/unlocking 23 Consumption, refer to Aver‐

age fuel consumption 60 Control Display, care 189 Controls and displays 12 Control systems, driving stabil‐

ity 81 Convenient operation, win‐

dow 23 Coolant temperature 59 Cooling function, switching on

and off 92 Cooling, maximum 91 Cornering Brake Control,

CBC 81 Corrosion on brake discs 112

Seite 211

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

211Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 214: 2015 countryman

Cradle for telephone or mobilephone, refer to Snap-inadapter 143

Cruise control 85 Cupholders 98 Current fuel consumption 60 Curve lights, refer to Adaptive

Light Control 68

DDashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 69 Dashboard, refer to Cock‐

pit 12 Dashboard, refer to Dis‐

plays 14 Date, display format 61 Date, setting 62 Daytime running lights 67 Decorative trim, care 189 Defogging windows 89 Defroster, rear window, auto‐

matic climate control 92 Defroster, rear window, with

air conditioner 89 Defrosting windows 89 Defrost setting, refer to De‐

frosting windows 89 Digital compass 96 Dip stick, engine oil 166 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 51 Display lighting, refer to In‐

strument lighting 69 Displays 14 Displays and controls 12 Displays, care 189 Displays, cleaning 189 Displays, refer to Instrument

cluster 14 Disposal, remote control bat‐

tery 30 Distance warning, refer to

Park Distance ControlPDC 86

Door key, refer to Remotecontrol with integratedkey 20

Door lock 24 Door lock, confirmation sig‐

nals 23 Doors, manual operation 25 Doors, unlocking and locking,

confirmation signals 23 Doors, unlocking and locking

from the inside 25 Doors, unlocking and locking,

from the outside 22 DOT Quality Grades 156 Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill

drive-off assistant 83 Driving notes, breaking

in 110 Driving off on hills, refer to Hill

drive-off assistant 83 Driving on poor roads 113 Driving stability control sys‐

tems 81 Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 110 Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐

tion 92 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 81 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol 82 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 81 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 82

EElectrical malfunction, door

lock 25 Electrical malfunction, fuel

filler flap 148 Electronic brake-force distri‐

bution 81

Electronic Stability ProgramESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil‐ity Control DSC 81

Emergency operation, fuelfiller flap, unlocking man‐ually 148

Emergency operation, refer toManual operation 25

Emergency operation, Step‐tronic transmission, refer toSelector lever lock, overrid‐ing 57

Energy, saving, refer to Savingfuel 118

Engine, breaking in 110 Engine compartment 164 Engine oil, adding 166 Engine oil, additives, refer to

Approved engine oils 167 Engine oil, alternative oil

types 167 Engine oil change intervals,

refer to Service require‐ments 63

Engine oil, dip stick 166 Engine oil, filling capacity 209 Engine oil, MINI maintenance

system 169 Engine oil types, alterna‐

tive 167 Engine oil types, ap‐

proved 167 Engine, overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 59 Engine start, assistance 181 Engine, starting 49 Engine, starting, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28 Engine, starting, Start/Stop

button 48 Engine, stopping, Start/Stop

button 48 Engine, switching off 50 Equipment, interior 94

Seite 212

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 215: 2015 countryman

ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐bility Control DSC 81

Exchanging wheels/tires 159 Exterior mirrors 40 Exterior mirrors, adjusting 40 Exterior mirrors, folding in and

out 41 Exterior sensors, care 189 External temperature dis‐

play 58 External temperature display,

changing the units 61 External temperature warn‐

ing 58

FFailure messages, refer to

Check Control 64 False alarm, refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 31 Fan, refer to Air flow rate for

air conditioner 89 Fan, refer to Air flow rate with

automatic climate con‐trol 91

Fastening safety belts, refer toSafety belts 37

Fault messages, refer to CheckControl 64

Filling capacities 209 Filter, refer to Activated-char‐

coal filter 90 Filter, refer to Microfilter 90 Filter, refer to Microfilter/acti‐

vated-charcoal filter with au‐tomatic climate control 92

First aid kit 181 First aid, refer to First aid

kit 181 Flashing when locking/unlock‐

ing 23 Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor 75 Flat tire, indicator/warning

lamp 75

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 74 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, flat tire

message 75 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, initializ‐

ing the system 74 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow

chains 74 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, system

limits 74 Flat tire, run-flat tire 75 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor 76 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 76 Flat tire, wheel change 178 Floor mats, care 189 Fog lights 69 Foot brake 111 Footwell lights, refer to Inte‐

rior lights 69 Four-wheel drive, refer to

ALL4 83 Front airbags 71 Front fog light, bulb replace‐

ment 174 Front fog lights 69 Front lights, bulb replace‐

ment 173 Front passenger airbags, de‐

activating 72 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 74 Fuel 150 Fuel, additives 150 Fuel, average consump‐

tion 60 Fuel cap, closing 148 Fuel consumption display,

average fuel consump‐tion 60

Fuel filler flap, closing 148 Fuel filler flap, opening 148 Fuel filler flap, unlocking in

case of an electrical malfunc‐tion 148

Fuel gauge 59

Fuel, refer to Average fuelconsumption 60

Fuel, saving 118 Fuel tank capacity, refer to

Filling capacities 209 Fuel tank contents, refer to

Filling capacities 209 Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐

pacities 209 Fuse 179

GGarage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remotecontrol 94

Gasoline 150 Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel

gauge 59 Gear change, manual trans‐

mission 55 Gear change, Steptronic trans‐

mission 56 Gear display, Steptronic trans‐

mission 55 Glare protection 96 Glass sunroof, electrical 31 Glass sunroof, electrical, open‐

ing/closing 32 Glass sunroof, electrical, rais‐

ing 32 Glass sunroof, electric, con‐

venient operation 23 Glass sunroof, electric, remote

control 23

HHalogen headlights, bulb re‐

placement 173 Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 50 Hand car wash, care 187 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐

nating code 95 Hands-free microphone 15

Seite 213

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

213Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 216: 2015 countryman

Hazard warning system 15 Head airbags 71 Headlamp control, refer to

Parking lamps/lowbeams 66

Headlamps, care 187 Headlight control, auto‐

matic 66 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐

ture 68 Headlight flasher 51 Headlights 66 Headlights, cleaning, washer

fluid 54 Head restraints 39 Head restraints, adjusting the

height 39 Head restraints, removing 40 Heatable rear window, air

conditioner 89 Heatable windshield 92 Heating, rear window with au‐

tomatic climate control 92 Heating, seats 37 Heating, windshield 92 Height adjustment, seats 35 High-beams 67 High beams, bulb replace‐

ment 173 Hill drive-off assistant 83 Hills 112 Holder for remote control, re‐

fer to Ignition lock 48 Homepage 6 Hood 165 Hood, closing 165 Hood, opening 165 Hood, unlocking 165 Horn 12 Hydraulic brake assistant 81

IIce warning, refer to External

temperature warning 58

Icy roads, refer to Externaltemperature warning 58

Identification marks, run-flattires 160

Identification marks, tires 156 Ignition 49 Ignition key position 1, refer

to Radio ready state 48 Ignition key position 2, refer

to Ignition on 49 Ignition key, refer to Remote

control with integratedkey 20

Ignition lock 48 Ignition, switched off 49 Ignition, switched on 49 Indicator and warning lamps,

overview 191 Indicator and warning lamps,

Tire Pressure MonitorTPM 77

Indicator and warninglights 15

Individual air distribution 89 Inflation pressure monitor, re‐

fer to Flat Tire Monitor 74 Inflation pressure monitor, re‐

fer to Tire Pressure MonitorTPM 76

Inflation pressure, refer to Tireinflation pressure 152

Initializing, compass, refer toCalibrating 97

Initializing, Flat Tire MonitorFTM 74

Initializing, glass sunroof,electrical 32

Instrument cluster, refer toDisplays 14

Instrument lighting 69 Instruments, refer to Cock‐

pit 12 Integrated key 20 Integrated universal remote

control 94 Interior equipment 94

Interior lights 69 Interior lights, remote con‐

trol 24 Interior mirror 41 Interior motion sensor 31 Interior rearview mirror, com‐

pass 96 Interior temperature, setting,

air conditioner 88 Interior temperature, setting,

automatic climate con‐trol 90

Internet page 6

JJump-starting 181

KKeyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 28 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort Access 28 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 20 Key, refer to Remote control

with integrated key 20 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐

mission 56 Knee airbag 71 Knocking control 150

LLamp and bulb replacement,

bulb replacement 172 Lamp, replacing, refer to

Lamp and bulb replace‐ment 172

Lamps 66 Lamps, automatic headlight

control 66 Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer

to Safety belts 37

Seite 214

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 217: 2015 countryman

LATCH child restraint fixingsystem 44

Leather, care 188 Leather care 188 LEDs, light-emitting di‐

odes 172 License plate light, bulb re‐

placement 176 Light-alloy wheels, care 189 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 172 Lighter, socket 98 Lighting, instruments 69 Lighting, lamp and bulb re‐

placement 172 Lighting, vehicle, refer to

Lamps 66 Lights, parking lamps/low

beams 66 Light switch 66 Lock buttons on doors, refer

to Locking 25 Locking from the inside 25 Locking, from the outside 23 Locking, setting the confirma‐

tion signal 23 Locking the vehicle from the

inside 25 Locking vehicle, from the out‐

side 22 Locking without remote con‐

trol, refer to Comfort Ac‐cess 28

Longlife oils, alternative oiltypes 167

Longlife oils, refer to Ap‐proved engine oils 167

Low beams 66 Low beams, automatic 66 Low beams, bulb replace‐

ment 173 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 36 Lumbar support 36

MMain inspection, refer to Serv‐

ice requirements 63 Maintenance, refer to Service

booklet Maintenance, refer to Service

requirements 63 Maintenance require‐

ments 169 Maintenance system

MINI 169 Makeup mirror 96 Malfunction, door lock 25 Malfunction, fuel filler

flap 148 Malfunction, Steptronic trans‐

mission 57 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 64 Manual air distribution, air

conditioner 89 Manual air distribution, auto‐

matic climate control 92 Manual mode, Steptronic

transmission 56 Manual operation, door

lock 25 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 148 Manual operation, selector

lever lock, Steptronic trans‐mission 57

Marking on approvedtires 159

Maximum cooling 91 Maximum speed, winter

tires 160 Microfilter 90 Microfilter, with automatic cli‐

mate control 92 MINI Homepage 6 MINI Internet page 6 MINI maintenance sys‐

tem 169 MINI Mobility System 161

Minimum tread, tires 158 Mirrors 40 Mirrors, folding in and out 41 Mirrors, interior mirror 41 Mobile communication devi‐

ces in the vehicle 111 Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐

phone 136 Mobility System 161 Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 6 Mounting of child restraint fix‐

ing systems 43

NNeck restraints, refer to Head

restraints 39 New wheels and tires 159 Notes 6 Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐

tion 93

OOBD Onboard Diagnos‐

tics 170 OBD socket, refer to Socket

for OBD Onboard Diagno‐sis 170

Octane number, refer to Fuelquality 150

Octane rating, refer to Recom‐mended fuel grade 150

Odometer 58 Oil additives 167 Oil level 166 Oil types, alternative 167 Oil types, approved 167 Onboard Diagnostics

OBD 170 Opening and closing, Comfort

Access 28 Opening and closing from the

inside 25

Seite 215

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

215Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 218: 2015 countryman

Opening and closing, from theoutside 22

Opening and closing, usingthe door lock 24

Opening and closing, via theremote control 22

Opening and unlocking fromthe inside 25

Outside air mode, automaticclimate control 91

Outside air, refer to Recircu‐lated air mode, air condi‐tioner 89

Outside air, refer to Recircu‐lated air mode, automaticclimate control 91

Overheating of engine, referto Coolant temperature 59

PPark Distance Control PDC 86 Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐

tance Control PDC 86 Parking assistant, refer to Park

Distance Control PDC 86 Parking brake 50 Parking light, bulb replace‐

ment 174 Parking lights 66 Parking lights/low beams 66 PDC Park Distance Control 86 Personal Profile 20 Pinch protection, windows 33 Pivoting sun visor 96 Plastic, care 188 Pollen, refer to Microfilter 90 Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter 90 Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter withautomatic climate con‐trol 92

Poor road operation 113 Power windows 33

Power windows, refer to Win‐dows 32

Prescribed engine oils, refer toApproved engine oils 167

Pressure monitoring of tires,refer to Tire Pressure MonitorTPM 76

Pressure, tires 152 Pressure warning, tires 74 Profile depth, refer to Mini‐

mum tread depth 158 Profile, tires 157 Protective function, refer to

Pinch protection system,windows 33

RRadio MINI Boost CD 122 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control withintegrated key 20

Radio ready state 48 Radio ready state, switched

off 49 Radio ready state, switched

on 48 Radio setting, refer to Radio

ready state 48 Rain sensor 52 Range 60 Rear 36 Rear fog light, bulb replace‐

ment 176 Rear lights, refer to Tail

lights 176 Rear seat backrests, foldable,

MINI Countryman 100 Rear seat backrests, foldable,

MINI Paceman 101 Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐

rors 40 Rear window defroster with

air conditioner 89

Rear window defroster withautomatic climate con‐trol 92

Rear window, washing 54 Rear window wiper 54 Recirculated air mode, air

conditioner 89 Recirculated air mode, auto‐

matic climate control 91 Recommended fuel

grade 150 Recommended tire

brands 159 Releasing, refer to Unlock‐

ing 28 Remaining range for service,

refer to Service require‐ments 63

Remaining range, refer toRange 60

Remote control 20 Remote control, battery re‐

placement 30 Remote control, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28 Remote control, Comfort Ac‐

cess, malfunctions 29 Remote control, garage door

opener 94 Remote control, radio interfer‐

ence 24 Remote control, removing

from the ignition lock 48 Remote control, service

data 169 Remote control, universal 94 Replacement remote con‐

trol 20 Replacing wheels/tires 159 Reporting safety defects 9 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 59 Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐

fer to Washer fluid reser‐voir 54

Seite 216

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 219: 2015 countryman

Restraining systems, refer toSafety belts 37

Restraint systems for chil‐dren 43

Retreaded tires 159 Reverse gear, manual trans‐

mission 55 Roadside Assistance 181 Roadside parking light, bulb

replacement 174 Roadside parking lights 67 RON recommended fuel

grade 150 RON, refer to Fuel quality 150 Rubber seals, care 189 Run-flat tires 160 Run-flat tires, flat tire 75 Run-flat tires, tire inflation

pressure 152

SSafe braking 111 Safety 6 Safety belts 37 Safety belts, care 189 Safety belts, damage 39 Safety belts, indicator/warning

lamp 39 Safety belts, rear center safety

belt 38 Safety belts, reminder 39 Safety systems, airbags 71 Safety systems, safety

belts 37 Saving fuel 118 Seat adjustment 36 Seat adjustment, manual 35 Seat heating 37 Seats 35 Seats, adjusting 35 Seats, heating 37 Seats, sitting safely 35 Selector lever lock, overrid‐

ing 57

Selector lever lock, refer to Se‐lector level positions, chang‐ing, shiftlock 56

Selector lever positions, Step‐tronic transmission 56

Selector lever, Steptronictransmission 56

Service and warranty 7 Service data in the remote

control 169 Service interval display, refer

to Condition Based ServiceCBS 169

Service interval display, referto Service requirements 63

Service requirements 63 Service requirements, CBS

Condition Based Service 169 Settings and information 60 Settings, clock 61 Settings, configuring, refer to

Personal Profile 20 Shifting, manual transmis‐

sion 55 Shifting, Steptronic transmis‐

sion 56 Shift lever, Steptronic trans‐

mission 56 Shift paddles on the steering

wheel 57 Side airbags 71 Side windows, refer to Win‐

dows 32 Sitting safely 35 Sliding/tilting sunroof, refer to

Glass sunroof, electrical 31 Slot for remote control 48 Snap-in adapter, mobile

phone 143 Snow chains 163 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagno‐

sis 170 Special equipment, series

equipment 6 Speed, average 60 Speedometer 14

Speed, with winter tires 160 Sport button 83 Sport program, Steptronic

transmission 56 Stability control systems 81 Start/Stop button 48 Start/Stop button, starting the

engine 49 Start/Stop button, switching

off the engine 50 Starting the engine 49 Start problems, refer to Jump-

starting 181 Steering wheel 42 Steering wheel, adjusting 42 Steering wheel lock 48 Steering wheel, shift pad‐

dles 57 Steptronic transmission 55 Steptronic transmission, kick‐

down 56 Steptronic transmission, over‐

riding the selector leverlock 57

Stopping, engine 50 Storage, tires 160 Storing the vehicle 190 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 152 Summer tires, tread 157 Sun visor 96 Switches, refer to Cockpit 12 Switching off, engine 50 Switching off, vehicle 50 Symbols 6

TTachometer 59 Tailgate 26 Tailgate, Comfort Access 28 Tailgate, opening/closing 26 Tailgate, opening from the

outside 26 Tail lights 176

Seite 217

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

217Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 220: 2015 countryman

Tank gauge, refer to Fuelgauge 59

Technical changes, refer toSafety 6

Telephone 136 Temperature, air condi‐

tioner 89 Temperature, automatic cli‐

mate control 92 Temperature, coolant, refer to

Coolant temperature 59 Temperature display– External temperature warn‐

ing 58Temperature display, external

temperature 58 Temperature display, setting

the units 61 Temperature warning 58 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 30 Tilt alarm sensor 31 Time, setting the time 62 Tire age 158 Tire, flat tire 75 Tire identification marks 156 Tire inflation pressure 152 Tire inflation pressure, pres‐

sure loss, FTM 75 Tire pressure loss, RDC 77 Tire, pressure monitoring, re‐

fer to Tire Pressure MonitorTPM 76

Tire pressure monitor, refer toFlat Tire Monitor 74

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 76 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,

system limits 79 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,

system reset 77 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,

warning lamp 77 Tire Quality Grading 156 Tires, breaking in 110 Tires, changing 159 Tires, condition 157

Tires, damage 158 Tire size 156 Tires, minimum tread 158 Tires, retreaded tires 159 Tires, storage 160 Tire tread 157 Towing another vehicle 183 Towing, being towed 183 Tow-starting 183 TPM, refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 76 Traction control 82 Transmission lock, refer to

Changing the selector leverpositions 56

Transmission, overriding theselector lever lock with Step‐tronic transmission 57

Transmission, refer to Manualtransmission 55

Transmission, see Steptronictransmission 55

Transporting childrensafely 43

Trip-distance counter, refer toTrip odometer 58

Triple turn signal activa‐tion 51

Trip odometer 58 Trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 26 Trunk, refer to Cargo area 26 Turning lights, refer to Adap‐

tive Light Control 68 Turn signal, bulb replace‐

ment 174 Turn signal indicator lamp 14 Turn signals 51 Turn signals, triple turn signal

activation 51

UUniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQG 156 Unintentional alarms, avoid‐

ing 31

Units, average fuel consump‐tion 61

Units, temperature 61 Universal remote control 94 Unlocking from the inside 25 Unlocking, from the out‐

side 22 Unlocking, tailgate 28 Unlocking, without remote

control, refer to Comfort Ac‐cess 28

Upholstery care 188 Upholstery material care 188 USB audio interface 131

VVanity mirror 96 Vehicle battery 179 Vehicle, breaking in 110 Vehicle care 187 Vehicle care, refer to

Care 186 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle paintwork, care 188 Vehicle storage 190 Vehicle, switching off 50 Vehicle wash 186 Ventilation, air conditioner 93

WWarning and indicator

lamps 15 Warning and indicator lamps,

overview 191 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 64 Warning triangle 181 Washer/wiper system 52 Washer/wiper system, rain

sensor 52 Washer/wiper system, washer

fluid 54 Washer fluid 54 Washer fluid reservoir 54

Seite 218

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 221: 2015 countryman

Washing, vehicle 186 Welcome lights 68 Wheel change 178 Wheels and tires 152 Wheels, changing 159 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 74 Window, convenient opera‐

tion 23 Windows 32 Windows, care 187 Windows, closing 33 Windows, defrosting and de‐

fogging 89 Windows, opening 33 Windows, pinch protection 33 Windshield defroster 92 Windshield, defrosting and

defogging 89 Windshield, defrosting, refer

to Defrosting windows 89 Windshield wash 52 Windshield washer fluid 54 Windshield wash, rear win‐

dow 54 Windshield wash, reservoir for

washer fluid 54 Windshield wash, washer

fluid 54 Windshield wiper blades,

changing 171 Windshield wiper, refer to

Washer/wiper system 52 Winter storage, care 190 Winter tires 159 Winter tires, tread 157 Wiper blades, care 187 Wiper blades, changing 171 Wiper fluid 54

YYour individual vehicle, set‐

tings, refer to Personal Pro‐file 20

Seite 219

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

219Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Page 222: 2015 countryman
Page 223: 2015 countryman

01 4

0 2

961

084

ue

*BL2961084000*

DRIVE ME.Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15